YASKAWA Varispeed F7 CIMR-F7A Inverter Instruction Manual

VARISPEED-F7
Instruction Manual
MODEL: CIMR-F7A
200V CLASS 0.4 to 110kW
400V CLASS 0.4 to 18.5kW
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions
thoroughly, and retain for future reference.
WARNING
YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications.
The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment
designer or end user. YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated
into the final system design.
Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as
the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults
dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and
instructions as to that part’s safe use and operation. Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be
promptly provided to the end user.
YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards
and specifications published in YASKAWA’s manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage,
losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products.
Preface
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable
application of Varispeed F7-Series Inverters. Read this
manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or
inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Before you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the
instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only
and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the
manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front
cover.
• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
F7 Instruction Manual
I
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the
products or to related equipment and systems.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage
to the product, or faulty operation.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending on
the situation.
Indicates important information that should be followed.
IMPORTANT
II
F7 Instruction Manual
Safety Precautions
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Installation
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other non-flammable material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a flammable material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same
enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45°C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Wiring
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V class: Ground
to 10 Ω or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output lines.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
CAUTION
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring
examples.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
F7 Instruction Manual
III
CAUTION
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
• Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the over current protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
Setting User Constants
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational auto tuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set
with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor during autotuning.
The motor may start operating suddenly, possibly resulting in injury.
Test Run
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply. Do not
remove the front cover while the power is applied.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared,
the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its
function is set.
Injury may occur.
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can
become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable operation ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
IV
F7 Instruction Manual
CAUTION
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
F7 Instruction Manual
V
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. Always turn
OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB before removing the cover.
Otherwise electric shock can occur.
• After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out
before performing maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use insulated tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in injury.
Other
WARNING
• Never attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
VI
F7 Instruction Manual
Warning Information and Position
Warning information is printed in the position shown in the following illustration. Always follow the
warnings.
Warning
information
position
Warning
information
position
Illustration shows the CIMR-F7A20P4
Illustration shows the CIMR-F7A2022
Warning Information
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
ŸRead manual before installing.
ŸWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de décharge électrique.
ŸLire le manuel avant l' installation.
ŸAttendre 5 minutes aprés la coupure de
l' allmentation. Pour permettre la
décharge des condensateurs.
!
Ÿ
Ÿ
F7 Instruction Manual
VII
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echolon.
VIII
F7 Instruction Manual
Contents
1
Handling Inverters...................................................................1-1
Varispeed F7 Introduction ............................................................................ 1-2
Varispeed F7 Applications.............................................................................................. 1-2
Varispeed F7 Models...................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................ 1-4
Checks ........................................................................................................................... 1-4
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4
Component Names ........................................................................................................ 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. 1-8
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-8
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)................................................................... 1-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site............................................ 1-11
Installation Site ..............................................................................................................1-11
Controlling the Ambient Temperature............................................................................1-11
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ..................................................................1-11
Installation Orientation and Space ............................................................. 1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................. 1-13
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-13
Attaching the Terminal Cover ....................................................................................... 1-14
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................ 1-15
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less ........................................................................................ 1-15
Inverters of 22 kW or More........................................................................................... 1-18
2
Wiring .......................................................................................2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices .............................................................. 2-2
Connection Diagram .................................................................................... 2-3
Terminal Block Configuration ....................................................................... 2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals....................................................................... 2-6
Wire Sizes and Applicable Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions................................................................................... 2-13
Main Circuit Configurations .......................................................................................... 2-14
F7 Instruction Manual
IX
Standard Connection Diagrams ................................................................................... 2-15
Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................ 2-16
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals................................................................. 2-24
Wire Sizes and Applicable Closed-loop Connectors .................................................... 2-24
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-26
Control Circuit Terminal Connections........................................................................... 2-30
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................ 2-31
Wiring Check.............................................................................................. 2-32
Checks.......................................................................................................................... 2-32
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-33
3
Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-33
Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-33
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications ................................................. 2-34
Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 2-37
Wiring Terminal Blocks................................................................................................. 2-42
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................ 2-44
Digital Operator and Modes ...................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Display.................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-5
X
Inverter Modes................................................................................................................ 3-5
Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-6
Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-7
Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-8
Advanced Programming Mode ..................................................................................... 3-10
Verify Mode................................................................................................................... 3-14
Auto tuning Mode ......................................................................................................... 3-15
F7 Instruction Manual
4
Test Run ...................................................................................4-1
Test Run Procedure ..................................................................................... 4-2
Test Run Operation ..................................................................................... 4-3
Application Confirmation ................................................................................................ 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) 4-3
Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-4
Checking the Display Status........................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-5
Settings for the Control Methods.................................................................................... 4-8
Auto tuning ................................................................................................................... 4-10
Application Settings...................................................................................................... 4-14
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-14
Loaded Operation......................................................................................................... 4-15
Check and Recording User Constants ......................................................................... 4-16
Adjustment Suggestions .......................................................................... 4-117
5
User Constants ........................................................................5-1
User Constant Descriptions ......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode.................................................. 5-4
User Constant Tables ................................................................................... 5-8
F7 Instruction Manual
A: Setup Settings............................................................................................................ 5-8
B: Application Constants .............................................................................................. 5-11
C: Tuning Constants..................................................................................................... 5-18
D: Reference Constants ............................................................................................... 5-24
E: Motor Constants....................................................................................................... 5-28
F: Option Constants ..................................................................................................... 5-32
H: Terminal Function Constants................................................................................... 5-38
L: Protection Function Constants ................................................................................. 5-47
N: Special Adjustments ................................................................................................ 5-57
O: Digital Operator Constants ...................................................................................... 5-59
T: Motor Auto tuning..................................................................................................... 5-63
U: Monitor Constants.................................................................................................... 5-64
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)................................... 5-70
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)................................. 5-73
XI
6
Constant Settings by Function ..............................................6-1
Application and Overload Selections ........................................................... 6-2
Select the Overload to Suit the Application .................................................................... 6-2
Frequency Reference................................................................................... 6-6
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source................................................................... 6-6
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ................................................................................. 6-9
Run Command ........................................................................................... 6-12
Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-12
Stopping Methods ...................................................................................... 6-15
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent .................................. 6-15
Using the DC Injection Brake ....................................................................................... 6-18
Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................ 6-19
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics .......................................... 6-20
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times............................................................... 6-20
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)..................................... 6-24
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) ........................................................... 6-24
Preventing Over voltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function) .......................................................... 6-27
Adjusting Frequency References ............................................................... 6-29
Adjusting Analog Frequency References ..................................................................... 6-29
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)....................................... 6-31
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ........................................... 6-34
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)................................... 6-35
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency........................................................................... 6-35
Limiting Minimum Frequency........................................................................................ 6-35
Improved Operating Efficiency ................................................................... 6-37
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function).............................. 6-37
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation) ................................................................................................ 6-40
Hunting-prevention Function ........................................................................................ 6-42
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) ............................................ 6-42
Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-43
XII
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) ............................................................. 6-43
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-43
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input .................. 6-45
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-46
Changing Over torque and Under torque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input ..... 6-46
Motor Overload Protection............................................................................................ 6-50
F7 Instruction Manual
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-54
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction ................................................................................. 6-55
Continuing Operation ................................................................................. 6-56
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored ....................................................... 6-56
Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-57
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ........... 6-62
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-63
Inverter Protection...................................................................................... 6-64
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors............................. 6-64
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-65
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-66
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-66
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Base block Commands)..................................................... 6-67
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold)....... 6-68
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) .... 6-69
Adding and Subtracting Constant Frequency to the Analog Reference
(+/- Speed) ................................................................................................................... 6-72
Hold Analog Frequency a desired Timing .................................................................... 6-73
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit
Terminals...................................................................................................................... 6-74
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG) .............................................................................................................. 6-74
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Peripheral Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Error Function) .............................................................................................. 6-75
Monitor Constants ...................................................................................... 6-77
Using the Analog Monitor Constants............................................................................ 6-77
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents............................................................................. 6-80
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-82
Using MEMOBUS Communications............................................................................. 6-82
Using the Timer Function ............................................................................................. 6-96
Using PID Control......................................................................................................... 6-97
Energy-saving ............................................................................................................ 6-106
Setting Motor Constants............................................................................................. 6-108
Setting the V/f Pattern ................................................................................................ 6-110
Digital Operator Functions ....................................................................... 6-117
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting Digital Operator Functions ..............................................................................6-117
Copying Constants ......................................................................................................6-119
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator............................................. 6-123
Setting a Password .................................................................................................... 6-123
Displaying User-set Constants Only........................................................................... 6-124
XIII
Options..................................................................................................... 6-125
Performing Speed Control with PG ............................................................................ 6-125
Using Digital Output Cards ......................................................................................... 6-129
7
Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions............................................................ 7-2
Fault Detection ............................................................................................................... 7-2
Alarm Detection .............................................................................................................. 7-9
Operation Errors ........................................................................................................... 7-12
Errors During Auto tuning ............................................................................................ 7-14
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................ 7-15
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 7-17
If Constants Cannot Be Set .......................................................................................... 7-17
If the Motor Does Not Operate ..................................................................................... 7-18
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed........................................................ 7-19
If the Motor Output Torque is Low or If Acceleration is Slow ........................................ 7-20
If the Motor Speed is Higher Than the Reference ........................................................ 7-20
If the Slip Compensation Function has Low Speed Precision ...................................... 7-21
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop Vector
Control Mode ................................................................................................................ 7-21
If Motor Deceleration is Slow........................................................................................ 7-21
If the Motor Overheats.................................................................................................. 7-22
If There is Electrical Noise on the Controller When the Inverter is Started/ If There
8
is Audio Noise on the AM Radio................................................................................... 7-22
If the Ground Fault Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Run ................................. 7-24
If There is Mechanical Oscillation................................................................................. 7-24
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped........................................ 7-26
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls............................................. 7-26
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ...................................... 7-26
Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2
XIV
Outline of Maintenance................................................................................................... 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts........................................................................................ 8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline.................................................................................. 8-4
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card ........................................... 8-6
F7 Instruction Manual
9
Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................................................. 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ....................................... 9-5
10
Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-2
Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-2
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-3
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-3
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-4
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor........................................................ 10-5
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ........................................................................... 10-7
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ..................... 10-7
Wiring Examples ........................................................................................ 10-8
Using a Braking Resistor Unit ...................................................................................... 10-8
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit........................................................... 10-8
Using Braking Units in Parallel ................................................................................... 10-10
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel............................ 10-11
Using a VS Operator .................................................................................................. 10-12
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an
Internal Power Supply ................................................................................................ 10-13
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an
External Power Supply ............................................................................................... 10-14
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs ............................................................... 10-15
User Constants......................................................................................... 10-16
F7 Instruction Manual
XV
XVI
F7 Instruction Manual
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed F7 Introduction ............................................ 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................ 1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................. 1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site.............1-11
Installation Orientation and Space ............................. 1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover............. 1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover ......................................................... 1-15
F7 Installation Manual
1-1
Varispeed F7 Introduction
Varispeed F7 Applications
The Varispeed F7 is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Test Run.
Varispeed F7 Models
The Varispeed-F7 Series include two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300
kW (41 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models
Voltage
Class
200 V class
1-2
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed F7
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Order Model Number
(Always specify the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, Type 1 (NEMA 1))
CIMR-F7A
0.4
1.2
CIMR-F7A20P4
20P41
0.75
1.6
CIMR-F7A20P7
20P71
1.5
2.7
CIMR-F7A21P5
2.2
3.7
CIMR-F7A22P2
3.7
5.7
CIMR-F7A23P7
5.5
8.8
CIMR-F7A25P5
7.5
12
CIMR-F7A27P5
21P51
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
11
17
CIMR-F7A2011
20111
15
22
CIMR-F7A2015
20151
18.5
27
CIMR-F7A2018
22
32
CIMR-F7A2022
30
44
CIMR-F7A2030
20300
20301
37
55
CIMR-F7A2037
20370
20371
45
69
CIMR-F7A2045
20450
20451
55
82
CIMR-F7A2055
20550
20551
75
110
CIMR-F7A2075
20750
20751
90
130
CIMR-F7A2090
20900
-
110
160
CIMR-F7A2110
21100
-
20220
20181
20221
F7 Instruction Manual
Voltage
Class
400 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed F7
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Order Model Number
(Always specify the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, Type 1 (NEMA 1))
CIMR-F7A
0.4
1.4
CIMR-F7A40P4
40P41
0.75
1.6
CIMR-F7A40P7
40P71
1.5
2.8
CIMR-F7A41P5
2.2
4.0
CIMR-F7A42P2
3.7
5.8
CIMR-F7A43P7
5.5
9.5
CIMR-F7A45P5
7.5
13
CIMR-F7A47P5
41P51
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
42P21
43P71
45P51
47P51
11
18
CIMR-F7A4011
40111
15
24
CIMR-F7A4015
40151
18.5
30
CIMR-F7A4018
22
34
CIMR-F7A4022
30
46
CIMR-F7A4030
40300
40301
37
57
CIMR-F7A4037
40370
40371
45
69
CIMR-F7A4045
40450
40451
55
85
CIMR-F7A4055
40550
40551
75
110
CIMR-F7A4075
40750
40751
90
140
CIMR-F7A4090
40900
40901
110
160
CIMR-F7A4110
41100
41101
132
200
CIMR-F7A4132
41320
41321
40220
40181
40221
160
230
CIMR-F7A4160
41600
41601
185
280
CIMR-F7A4185
41850
-
220
390
CIMR-F7A4220
42200
-
300
510
CIMR-F7A4300
43000
-
F7 Installation Manual
1-3
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness as required.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your
Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications,
lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW, IEC
IP20 and Type 1 (NEMA 1) standards
Inverter
specifications
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output
specifications
Mass
Lot number
Serial number
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-4
F7 Instruction Manual
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor
capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR - F7 A 2 0P4
Inverter
Varispeed F7
No.
A
No.
2
4
*
Specification
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Standard domestic model
Voltage Class
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW *
"P" indicates the decimal point.
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
The following Inverters are under development:
400 V class, 185 to 300 kW
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the
protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P4 1
Voltage Class
No.
2
4
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW *
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
1) 1))
Type 1NEMA
(NEMA
"P" indicates the decimal point.
*
The following Inverters are under development:
400 V class, 185 to 300 kW
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
TERMS
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, Type 1 (NEMA 1))
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the
interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of Type 1 (NEMA 1) in the USA.
Top protective cover (Fig. 1.4) has to be installed to confirm with IEC IP20 and Type 1 (NEMA 1) requirements.
F7 Installation Manual
1-5
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the terminal
cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Top protective cover (Part of Enclosed Wall-mounted Type
(IEC IP20, Type 1 (NEMA 1)).
Mounting hole
Front cover
Digital Operator
Diecast case
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
E (G) FM
AC
AM
SC
A1
A2
S1
S2
S3
S4
P1
P2
PC
+V
AC
S6
S7
S5
SC
MP
RP R+ R- S+ SIG
MA MB MC
M1
M2 E (G)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
1-6
F7 Instruction Manual
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6. The Inverter with the terminal
cover removed is shown in Fig. 1.7.
Inverter cover
Front cover
Mounting holes
Cooling fan
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Fig 1.6 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
Charge indicator
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
F7 Installation Manual
1-7
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
H
t1
H2
H1
H
4-d
W1
4-d
H1
W1
D1
W
H2
t1
(5)
W
(5)
(5)
D
D1
3
D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
1-8
F7 Instruction Manual
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters Type 1 (NEMA1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) are shown below.
H0
H
Max.10
H1
H2
H
H0
H1
4-d
W1
4-d
H3
W1
t1
W
4
H3
H2
t1
(5)
D1
W
(5)
D1
(5)
D
Grommet
3
D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Max.
AppliVoltage cable
Class Motor
Output W
[kW]
Caloric Value
(W)
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
H
D
W1 H1
H2
D1
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
t1
Approx.
Mass
W
H
D
W1 H0
H1
H2
H3
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes
d*
Total Cooling
Heat
Method
Exter InterGennal
nal
eration
0.4
20
39
0.75
27
42
50
50
100
129
1.5
2.2
157
140 280
3.7
11
15
200 V
(3-phase) 18.5
65.5
240 350 207 216 335 7.5
30
275 450
55
75
375 600
258
300
330
195 385
13
450 725 350 325 700
500 850 360 370 820
575 885 380 445 855
F7 Installation Manual
6
2.3
3.2
140
300
310
350
21
250 535
24
275 615
86
87
4.5
200
240
63
108
150
39
126 280 266
7
380
380 890
59
197 186 300 285
10
207 216 350 335 7.5
258
300
330
3
5
0
177
11
57
130
15
140 280
7
100
250 575
90
78
157
4
100
220 435
110
3
5
200 300 197 186 285
250 400
45
7
59
22
37
126 266
177
5.5
7.5
39
0
30
195 400 385
135
220 450 435
165
250 600 575
210
13
455 1100 350 325 725 700
---
305
4
6
65.5
78
2.3
100
3.2
11
69 Natural
70
59
112
74
186
164
84
248
219 113 332
7
100
130
M5
59
374 170 544
M6
429 183 612
501 211 712
24
586 274 860
27
865 352 1217
62
1015 411 1426
68
1266 505 1771
94
M10
95
Fan
1588 619 2206
2019 838 997
M12
2437 997 3434
2733 1242 3975
1-9
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) (Continued)
Max.
AppliVoltage cable
Class Motor
Output W
[kW]
Caloric Value
(W)
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
H
D
W1 H1
H2
D1
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
t1
Approx.
Mass
W
H
D
W1 H0
H1
H2
H3
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes
d*
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
157
140 280
39
126 266
7
177
3
5
157
140 280
59
4
39
126 280 266
7
177
7.5
11
15
18.5
400 V
(3-phase)
22
30
90
110
132
160
4
65.5
6
200 300 197 186 300 285
65.5
6
240 350 207 216 335
78
10
240 350 207 216 350 335
78
10
275 450 258 220 435
7.5
100
2.3
21
275 535 258 220 450 435
7.5
85
100
2.3
24
325 550 283 260 535
105
36
450 725 350 325 700
13
3.2
130
500 850 360 370 820
575 925 380 445 895
15
88
89
102
4.5 120
140
325
715
14
39
53
17
41
58
36
48
84
59
56
115
80
68
148
127
82
209
Natural
193 114 307
252 158 410
326 172 498
426 208 634
M6 466 259 725
678 317 995
635
55
75
59
M5
200 300 197 186 285
37
45
5
0
5.5
3
Total Cooling
Heat
Method
Exter InterGennal
nal
eration
Fan
784 360 1144
283 260 550 535
455 1100 350 325 725 700
165
13
105
160 580 1325 380 445 925 895
15
901 415 1316
1203 495 1698
305
3.2
130
505 1245 360 370 850 820
40
395
400 140
96
97
122
M10
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
2097 853 2950
4.5 130 M12 2388 1002 3390
170
2791 1147 3938
185
220
Under development
300
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
1-10
F7 Instruction Manual
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.4 Installation Site
Type
Ambient Operating Temperature
Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted
-10 to + 40 °C
90% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis
-10 to + 45 °C
90% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before
installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel
that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other for-
eign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on flammable material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and flammable materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from salt.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air
conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter during Installation
Place a shield over the Inverter during installation to protect it from metal powder produced by drilling.
Remove the shield after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to
overheat.
F7 Installation Manual
1-11
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
50 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
30 mm min.
30 mm min.
120 mm min.
50 mm min.
Horizontal Space
Air
Vertical Space
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1-12
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, Type 1 (NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5
kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
F7 Instruction Manual
Removing/Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, pressing on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions
of arrows 1, and then lift up the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7A25P5 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover in the direction of arrows 1, and then lift up
the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)
F7 Installation Manual
1-13
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the
Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
For Inverters with 22kW or larger, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter,
and place the terminal cover by lifting it up towards the top of the Inverter.
1-14
F7 Instruction Manual
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front
Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this section.
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift
the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove as shown in Fig. 1.13.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-F7A45P5 Shown Above)
F7 Installation Manual
1-15
Removing the Front Cover
1. Loosen the screw on the front cover.
2. Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the
direction of arrow 2 to remove as shown in Fig. 1.14.
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7A45P5 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to
remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital Operator
may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the
front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the
following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
3. Tighten the screw on the front cover.
1-16
F7 Instruction Manual
A
B
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
F7 Installation Manual
1-17
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to
remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the front
cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks
into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-18
F7 Instruction Manual
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal
wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices ............................. 2-2
Connection Diagram ................................................... 2-3
Terminal Block Configuration ...................................... 2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals...................................... 2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals................................ 2-25
Wiring Check............................................................. 2-33
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................ 2-34
F7 Instruction Manual
2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic
contactor
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Inverter
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
F7 Instruction Manual
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to improve
input power factor (optional) Braking Resistor Unit (optional)
Short-circuit bar
MCCB
3-phase power
200 to 240 V
50/60 Hz
IM
Inverter
CIMR-F7A27P5
(Ground to 100 Ω max.)
Forward Run/Stop
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Default: Output
frequency
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
Ammeter adjustment
Multi-step speed
setting 1
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Multi-step speed
setting 2
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment
Jog frequency selection
Multi-function analog output 1
10 to 10 V 2 mA
CN5 (NPN setting)
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Shield terminal
Master speed
pulse train
Pulse train input
Frequency setting
adjustment
External
frequency
references
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
Frequency
setter
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VAC, 1 A max.
Frequency setting power
+15 V, 20 mA
0 to 10 V
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
Multi-function contact oputput
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.
Default: Running
signal
Open collector 1
Default: Zero
speed
Terminating
resistance
Open collector 2
Default:
Frequency
agree signal
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC 50 mA max.
IG
Shield
Twisted-pair wires
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-F7A27P5 Shown Above)
F7 Instruction Manual
2-3
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. Sequence input signals S1 to S7 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V external power supply, refer toTable 2.13.
6. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
7. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
8. DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400 V
Class Inverters for 22 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Remove the short bar when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
9. Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a
shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
2-4
F7 Instruction Manual
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
E (G) FM AC AM
SC A1
A2
S1
S2
S3
S4
P1 P2
PC
+V AC
S6 S7
S5
SC
MP
RP R+ R- S+ SIG
MA MB MC
M1
M2 E (G)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Control circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 22 kW Shown Above)
F7 Instruction Manual
2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual TOEC726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
2-6
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
,
F7A2015
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
,
1,
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
5.5
(10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14
(6)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
30
(4)
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M5
2.5
30 to 38
(4 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 38
(3 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
B1, B2
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2030
1.2 to 1.5
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2022
M4
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
3
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
F7A2018
1,
Possible
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
mm2(AWG)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600
V vinyl power cables
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-7
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2037
3
r/l1,
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2045
3
r/l1,
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2055
3
r/l1,
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2075
3
r/l1,
/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A2090
3
r/l1,
/l2
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
60 to 100
60
(2/0 to 4/0)
(2/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
30
(2 to 2/0)
(2)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
80 to 100
80
(3/0 to 4/0)
(3/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
38
(1 to 2/0)
(1)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
50 to 100
50 × 2P
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
100
100
(4/0)
(4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
Power cables, e.g., 600
30 to 60
50
V vinyl power cables
(3 to 4/0)
(1/0)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
80 to 125
80 × 2P
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 × 2P)
80 to 100
80 × 2P
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
100 to 200
100
(3/0 to 400)
(3/0)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
150 to 200
150 × 2P
(250 to 400) (250 × 2P)
100 to 150
100 × 2P
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 × 2P)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150
60 × 2P
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
2-8
F7 Instruction Manual
*
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
F7A2110
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
r/l1,
/l2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
200 × 2P,
or 50 × 4P
(350 × 2P,
or 1/0 ×
2P)
150 × 2P,
or 50 × 4P
Power cables, e.g., 600
(300 × 2P,
V vinyl power cables
or 1/0 ×
4P)
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
1,
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
1,
2, B1, B2,
F7A42P2
F7A43P7
1,
1,
1,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A47P5
,
F7A4011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7A4015
1,
1,
1,
1,
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
M5
2.5
M5
2.5
M5
(M6)
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
mm2 (AWG)
5.5(10)
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M4
F7A45P5
Possible
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
5.5
(10)
3.5
(12)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600
V vinyl power cables
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-9
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
F7A4018
F7A4022
F7A4030
,
1,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A4037
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A4045
3
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
8 to 38
(8 to 2)
8
(8)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
38 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
8
(8)
8
(8)
8
(8)
14
(6)
14
(6)
22
(4)
22
(4)
38
(2)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600
V vinyl power cables
22
(4)
38
(2)
22
(4)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
2-10
F7 Instruction Manual
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, s200/l2 200, s400/l2 400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, s200/l2 200, s400/l2 400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, s200/l2 200, s400/l2 400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, s200/l2 200, s400/l2 400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A4055
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A4075
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7A4090
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
F7A4110
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
F7A4132
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
F7A4160
3
r/l1, s200/l2 200, s400/l2 400
F7A4185
F7A4220
F7A4300
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
50
(1)
22
(4)
60
(2/0)
50
(1/0)
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
100
(4/0)
100
(4/0)
50
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P) Power cables, e.g., 600
50 × 2P V vinyl power cables
(1/0 × 2P)
600
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
60 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
Under development
The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-11
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2)
Terminal Screws
Size
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
2 to 3.5
M4
2 to 4
M5
2 to 5
M6
2 to 6
M8
2 to 8
M4
5.5 to 4
M5
5.5 to 5
M6
5.5 to 6
M8
5.5 to 8
M5
8 to 5
M6
8 to 6
M8
8 to 8
M6
14 to 6
M8
14 to 8
M6
22 to 6
M8
22 to 8
M8
38 to 8
M8
60 to 8
M10
60 to 10
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
3.5/5.5
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
80
M10
100
100
80 to 10
100 to 10
100 to 12
150
M12
200
150 to 12
200 to 12
325
M12 x 2
325 to 12
M16
325 to 16
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
IMPORTANT
2-12
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
F7 Instruction Manual
The following UL Listed closed-loop crimp connectors must be installed on conductors before
installing to terminal blocks.
Table 2.3.1 Recommended JST (or equivalent) Closed-loop terminals.
Model
CIMR-F7,-E7
Japan Solderless Terminal Part Number
Input Terminal
Output Terminal
2011
14-5
14-5
2018
38-8
38-8
2022
38-8
38-8
2030
60-8
60-8
2037
80-10
80-10
2045
150-10
150-10
2055
60-12
60-12
2075
80-12
80-12
2090
150-12
100-10
2110
150-12
150-12
4022
14-6
14-6
4030
22-6
22-6
4037
38-8
38-8
4045
60-8
60-8
4055
60-8
60-8
4075
100-12
80-10
4090
150-12
100-10
4110
60-12
60-12
4132
70-12
70-12
4160
100-12
80-12
NOTE: Use 75º C rated wire only for field wiring terminals (or equivalent).
F7 Instruction Manual
2-13
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC power input
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
2022 to 2110
4022 to 4160
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
20P4 to 2011
40P4 to 4018
20P4 to 2018
40P4 to 4018
2022 to 2110
4022 to 4160
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
1,
Braking Resistor Unit connecB1, B2
tion
DC reactor connection
1,
Braking Unit connection
3,
Ground
2-14
Model: CIMR-F7A
200 V Class
400 V Class
2
F7 Instruction Manual
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
400 V Class
CIMR-F7A20P4 to 2018
CIMR-F7A40P4 to 4018
U/T1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
Power
supply
U/T1
V/T2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
W/T3
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-F7A2022, 2030
Power
supply
CIMR-F7A4022 to 4055
Power
supply
Control
circuits
l
Control
circuits
CIMR-F7A4075 to 4160
CIMR-F7A2037 to 2110
l
Control
circuits
l
Power
supply
Control
circuits
l
l
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Note 1. The CIMR-4185 to 4300 Inverters are currently under development.
2. Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-15
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and 400 V
Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-F7A20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018
CIMR-F7A2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (200 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC
reactor.
CIMR-FA2037 to 2110
The DC reactor is built in.
CIMR-F7A4075 to 4160
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
3-phase
400 VAC
l
l
l
l
l
The DC reactor is built in.
The DC reactor is built in.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
Note: Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power for all Inverter models.
*1: The control power is input at r - for 200V class 30~75 kW (2030~2075) inverters and at r-400 for 400V class 55~300kW
(4055~4300) inverters. For other inverter models, the control power is internally supplied from the DC bus.
*2: r-R and (400) - S are jumpered at the factory. For 2018, 2022, 4018~4300 models, remove the jumper wire if the main
circuit power is to be supplied from the DC power supply.
2-16
F7 Instruction Manual
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at 150%
of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the
power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6.
Inverter
Power
supply
20P4 to 2030: 3-phase,
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2110:
3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300: 3-phase,
380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Fault output
(NC)
* For 400 V class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the
inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter specially designed for inverter use to detect only the leakage
current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
• Choose a ground fault interrupter specially designed for inverter use with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30
mA per Inverter.
• When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a model with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more
per inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-17
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor (MC) can be used
in place of a MCCB.
However, when a magnetic contactor on the primary side of the main circuit is used to forcibly stop the Inverter,
the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down. Start
and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recov-
ery from a power interruption.
• If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the
contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input
power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to
break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor
connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic
contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Installing a noise filter eliminates noise transmitted from the power line to the Inverter, and reduces noise from the
inverter to the power line.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply
Noise
filter
Inverter
Other
controllers
.
Use a noise filter specially designed for inverter use.
Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
2-18
F7 Instruction Manual
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply
Inverter
Generalpurpose
noise filter
Other
controllers
Power
supply
Generalpurpose
noise filter
Inverter
Other
controllers
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No generalpurpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.
Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals
to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the
internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing,
an electric shock or ground fault will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the
Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-19
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor. If the MC is turned ON while the
Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the over current protection in the Inverter will operate.
When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before operating the MC.
Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power interrupts
are required, use a delayed release MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal relay
(THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence should be
designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit
inputs.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power
supply
Noise
filter
Inverter
Radio noise
Signal line
Inductive
noise
AM radio
Controller
Inductive Noise:
Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise:
Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make
noise.
Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output
side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keeping the
metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power
supply
Metal pipe
Inverter
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
2-20
F7 Instruction Manual
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install
noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box
Power
supply
Noise
filter
Inverter
Metal pipe
Noise
filter
Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing
the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier
frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.)
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length
50 m max.
100 m max.
More than 100 m
Carrier frequency
15 kHz max.
10 kHz max.
5 kHz max.
C6-01 Setting
1
1
1
C6-02 Setting
0~6
0~4
0~2
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that of
the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if it is not properly grounded, potential on the ground
terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
NO
Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring
F7 Instruction Manual
2-21
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs from
0.4 to 11 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13. When using a braking resistor, set the constants according to
Table 2.7.
Table 2.7
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
1 (Enables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Inverter
Braking resistor
Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting
to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
IMPORTANT
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.13.
When using a braking resistor unit, set the constants according to Table 2.8.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 5.5 kW.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to Inverter)
is connected.
If L3-04 is set to 1 (stall prevention enabled), the braking resistor unit is not used, and the deceleration time is not
decreased.
2-22
F7 Instruction Manual
Chapter 2 - Wiring
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload
relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.14.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Thermal overload
relay trip contact
Inverter
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output
CDBR Braking
Unit
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Thermal
protector
trip contact
Inverter
Thermal overload
relay trip contact
Fig 2.14 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2.15. There
are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for the first
Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
F7 Instruction Manual
2-23
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Level
detector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Inverter
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking Unit #2
Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostat contacts)
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)
Fig 2.15 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Breaking Unit Application Precautions
When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor and turn OFF
the power supply to the Inverter.
Three-phase power:
200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or
380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Inverter
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
MC MA
Fault contacts
* Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power 400 V Inverter.
Fig 2.16 Power Shutoff Sequence
2-24
F7 Instruction Manual
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or operation
signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay
sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
E (G) Shield terminal
Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA
0 to +10 V
External
frequency
reference
Master speed reference, 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA
Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/0 to +10 V (20 Ω)
Pulse input, 33 kHz max.
Fig 2.17
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2(AWG)
FM, AC, AM, P1, P2,
PC, SC, A1, A2, +V, S1,
S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
0.75
(18)
0.75
(18)
1.25
(12)
MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-,
IG
Phoenix
type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire*3:
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded
wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
E (G)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solder less terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-25
Straight Solder less Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solder less terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.10 Straight Solder less Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm2 (AWG)
Model
d1
d2
L
0.25 (24)
AI 0.25 - 8YE
0.8
2
12.5
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5 - 8WH
1.1
2.5
14
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75 - 8GY
1.3
2.8
14
1.25 (16)
AI 1.5 - 8BK
1.8
3.4
14
2 (14)
AI 2.5 - 8BU
2.3
4.2
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
L
d1
d2
Fig 2.18 Straight Solder less Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control
circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solder less terminal
is used.
Solder less terminal or wire
without soldering
Wires
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.19 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-26
F7 Instruction Manual
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct
purposes.
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals
Analog input signals
Sequence input signals
Type
No.
Function
Signal Level
S1
Forward run/stop command
Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2
Reverse run/stop command
Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3
External fault input*1
Fault when ON.
S4
Fault reset*
Reset when ON
S5
Multi-step speed reference
1*1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Auxiliary frequency reference when ON.
S6
Multi-step speed reference
2*1
Multi-step setting 2 when
ON.
S7
Jog frequency reference*1
Jog frequency when ON.
SC
Sequence input common
+V
15 V power output
15 V power supply for analog references
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
Frequency reference
0 to +10 V/100%
0 to +10 V(20 kΩ)
A2
Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%
0 to +10 V/100%
AC
Analog reference common
-
-
Shield wire, optional ground
line connection point
-
-
E(G)
M1
Functions are
selected by setting
H1-01 to H1-05.
Function is
selected by setting
H3-09.
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
Multi-function
PHC outputs
Open-collector output
50 mA max. at 48 V*2
P1
Zero speed
On when zero level (b2-01)
or below
P2
Speed agreement detection
ON when within ±2 Hz of
set frequency.
PC
Open-collector output common
-
Fault output signal (form C)
CLOSED across MA and MC when fault occurs.
OPEN across MB and MC when fault occurs
MA
MC
F7 Instruction Manual
4 to 20 mA(250Ω)
0 to +10 V(20kΩ)
Multi-function
contact outputs
ON when during run.
MB
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photo coupler isolation
-
During run signal
(1NO contact)
M2
Sequence output signals
Signal Name
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
2-27
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type
Analog
output
signals
No.
Signal Name
Function
Signal Level
FM
Multi-function analog output
Multi-function ana0 to +10 V/100% frequency
(frequency output)
log monitor 1
AC
Analog common (copy)
AM
Multi-function analog output
5 V/Inverter's rated current
(current monitor)
RP
Pulse input*3
H6-01 (Frequency reference input)
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level voltage 3.5 to
13.2 V
MP
Pulse monitor
H6-06 (Output frequency)
0 to 32 kHz
+5 V output
(Load: 1.5 kΩ)
R+
MEMOBUS communications input
0 to +10 V max. ±5%
2 mA max.
Multi-function analog monitor 2
Pulse
I/O
RS485/
422
RS+
S-
MEMOBUS communications output
IG
Signal common
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as Rand S-.
Differential input, PHC
isolation
Differential input, PHC
isolation
-
-
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6
and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.20.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
H duty
30% to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
Flywheel diode
External power:
48 V max.
Coil
50 mA max.
The rating of the flywheel diode
must be at least as high as the
circuit voltage.
Fig 2.20 Flywheel Diode Connection
2-28
F7 Instruction Manual
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
CN5
O
F
F
S1
1
2
2))
9
21
Terminating resistance
,
Analog input switch
: Factory settings
Note: Refer to Table 2.12 for S1
functions and to Table
2.13 for CN5 functions.
Fig 2.21 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1
Name
Function
Setting
S1-1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
S1-2
Input method for analog input A2
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
F7 Instruction Manual
2-29
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V common) if shunt connector CN5 is used. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in
signal input methods.
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply
CN5
External Power Supply
CN5
CN5 (EXT set)
CN5 (NPN set) Factory setting
Shunt
position
Sinking
Mode
SC
IP24V (24 V)
External +24 V
SC
S1
S1
S2
S2
CN5
CN5
CN5 (PNP set)
SC
Sourcing
Mode
2-30
IP24V (24 V)
IP24V (24 V)
CN5 (EXT set)
External + 24 V
SC
S1
S1
S2
S2
IP24V (24 V)
F7 Instruction Manual
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.22.
Forward Run/Stop
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Reverse Run/Stop
Default: Output frequency
External fault
Fault reset
Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function
contact inputs
Multi-step speed
setting 1
Multi-function analog output 2
Defaults
Multi-step speed
setting 2
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Ammeter adjustment
Jog frequency selection
Multi-function analog output 1
CN5 (NPN setting)
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Shield terminal
Pulse train input
Frequency setting
adjustment
External
frequency
references
Frequency
setter
Master speed
pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
input
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.
Frequency setting power
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
+15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 W)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
Terminating
resistance
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 DC, 1 A max.
Default: Running signal
Open collector 1
Default: Zero
speed
Open collector 2
Default:
Frequency
agree signal
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VAC, 50 mA
Fig 2.22 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
F7 Instruction Manual
2-31
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3,
,
1,
2, and
3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to other
control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable
ends as shown in Fig 2.23.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath
Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal at Inverter (terminal E Insulate with tape
(G))
Fig 2.23 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
2-32
F7 Instruction Manual
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left in the inverter drive?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
F7 Instruction Manual
2-33
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one Card into each of the three places
on the controller card (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.24.
Table 2.14 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.14 Option Card Specifications
Card
Model
Specifications
Mounting Location
PG-A2
Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs
A
PG-B2
Phase A/B complimentary inputs
A
PG-D2
Single line-driver inputs
A
PG-X2
Phase A/B line-driver inputs
A
DeviceNet Communications
Card
SI-N
DeviceNet communications support
C
Profibus-DP Communications Card
SI-P
Profibus-DP communications support
C
InterBus-S Communications
Card
SI-R
InterBus-S communications support
C
AO-08
8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
D
AO-12
12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
D
DO-08
Six photo coupler outputs and 2 relay outputs
D
DO-02C
2 relay outputs
D
PG Speed Control Cards
Analog Monitor Card
Digital Output Card
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front cover
and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C, and
D.
2-34
F7 Instruction Manual
Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from
rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
CN4
A Option Card connector
CN2
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card.)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Cards)
D Option Card
CN3
D Option Card connector
D Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card
A Option Card mounting spacer
Fig 2.24 Mounting Option Cards
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.15 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
4
5
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
+12 V/open collector switching terminal
Pulse input terminal
6
7
8
TA2
F7 Instruction Manual
(E)
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input
and open collector input. For open collector input,
short across 3 and 4.
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
Pulse motor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
12 VDC (±10%), 20 mA max.
Pulse monitor output common
-
2-35
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.16 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
A-phase pulse input terminal
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
5
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
1
2
3
4
TA3
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
4
B-phase pulse input terminal
6
TA2
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
(E)
Pulse input common
A-phase monitor output terminal
B-phase monitor output terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output common
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output common
Shield connection terminal
-
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.17 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
1
2
Power supply for pulse generator
3
TA1
TA2
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4
Pulse input + terminal
5
Pulse input - terminal
6
Common terminal
7
Pulse monitor output + terminal
8
Pulse monitor output - terminal
(E)
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Shield connection terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
-
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-36
F7 Instruction Manual
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.18 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
1
2
Power supply for pulse generator
3
TA1
TA2
TA3
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4
A-phase + input terminal
5
A-phase - input terminal
6
B-phase + input terminal
7
B-phase - input terminal
8
Z-phase + input terminal
9
Z-phase - input terminal
10
Common terminal
1
A-phase + output terminal
2
A-phase - output terminal
3
B-phase + output terminal
4
B-phase - output terminal
5
Z-phase + output terminal
6
Z-phase - output terminal
7
Control circuit common
(E)
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Shield connection terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
Control circuit GND
-
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-37
Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the Control Cards.
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A2.
Three-phase, 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
PC-A2
+12 V power supply
1
2
4CN
4CN
TA1
E
E
TA2 (E)
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 V power supply
12 V voltage input (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Pulse monitor output
Fig 2.25 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
PC-A2
1
2
4CN
4CN
+12 V power supply
0 V power supply
3
TA1
E
4
5
6
E
TA2 (E)
7
8
Open collector output (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it
for any other purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.26 Wiring an Open-collector Input
2-38
F7 Instruction Manual
PG power
supply
+12 V
Pulse input
Short for
open-collector
input
Pulse
monitor
output
Pulse
input
Fig 2.27 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
F7 Instruction Manual
2-39
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B2.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (-)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it
for any other purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation,
A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.28 PG-B2 Wiring
A-phase pulse
input
B-phase pulse
input
A-phase
pulses
Division rate circuit
PG power
supply +12 V
A-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase
pulses
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photo coupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1-06.
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
Fig 2.29 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
2-40
F7 Instruction Manual
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D2.
Inverter
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it
for any other purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.30 PG-D2 Wiring
F7 Instruction Manual
2-41
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
Three-phase
200 VAC (400
VAC)
Inverter
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it
for any other purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for
motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.31 PG-X2 Wiring
2-42
F7 Instruction Manual
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19.
Table 2.19 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm2)
-
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
M3.5
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
equivalent)
Straight Solder less Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
We recommend using straight solder less terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.10 Straight Solder less Terminal Sizes for specifications.
F7 Instruction Manual
2-43
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.20.
Table 2.20 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm2]
Terminal
Screws
0.5
0.75
1.25
Crimp Terminal Size
Tightening Torque (N • m)
1.25 - 3.5
M3.5
2
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
0.8
2 - 3.5
Wiring Method and Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solder less terminals. Refer to page 2-26. Observe the
following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused
by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.23 for details on connecting
the shield.
• Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solder less terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
2-44
F7 Instruction Manual
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
Motor
speed at maximum frequency output (r/min)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------× PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
60
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table
2.21.
Table 2.21 PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor's Maximum Speed (r/min)
PG Rating
(p/rev)
PG Output Frequency for Maximum Frequency Output (Hz)
1800
600
18,000
1500
800
20,000
1200
1000
20,000
900
1200
18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup
capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary
power loss
Signals
Fig 2.32 PG-B2 Connection Example
F7 Instruction Manual
2-45
PG-D2/PG-X2
Notes:
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (r/min)
fPG (Hz) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × PG rating (p/rev)
60
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power
loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG-X2
PG power
supply
TA1
AC
IP12 1
2
IG
IP5
3
A (+) 4
A (-)
5
B (+) 6
B (-) 7
0V +12V
0V
Capacitor for
momentary
power loss
+12 V
+
+
-
PG
+
-
Z (+) 8
Z (-)
IG
9
10
TA3
Fig 2.33 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 V PG power supply)
2-46
F7 Instruction Manual
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator ........................................................... 3-2
Modes ......................................................................... 3-5
F7 Instruction Manual
3-1
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators
FWD:
Lit when there is a forward run command
input.
REV:
Lit when there is a reverse run command
input.
SEQ:
Lit when the run command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF:
Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and
settings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV:
Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lit in Auto tuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and auto tuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
3-2
F7 Instruction Manual
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key
Name
Function
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key
Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
JOG Key
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Increment Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Decrement Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by
the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will
light and flash to indicate operating status.
F7 Instruction Manual
3-3
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the dynamic
brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is shown in the
Fig 3.2.
Inverter output frequency
RUN
STOP
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
Lit
Blinking
Not lit
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-4
F7 Instruction Manual
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to
read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Modes
Mode
Primary function(s)
Drive mode
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Verify mode
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Auto tuning mode*
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
control mode. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform auto tuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Auto tuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error has
occurred.
F7 Instruction Manual
3-5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display. Press
the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access
the setting display.
Power ON
MENU
Drive Mode
DATA
ENTER
(Operation possible)
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Quick
Programming Mode
MENU
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Advanced
Programming Mode
MENU
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
When returning from a setting
display, the rightmost digit
of the monitor display will
flash.
ESC
MENU
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
If a user constant is changed
the number will be dislayed.
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Mode Selection Displays
Lit
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Autotuning
Mode
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Verify Mode
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Monitor Displays
Flashing
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Setting Displays
Not lit
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to enter the drive mode (DRIVE
indicator will flash) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the monitor
display (DRIVE indicator will light). Run commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display
I M P O R T in
A the
N Tdrive mode will appear when the power is turned ON.)
3-6
F7 Instruction Manual
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in drive
mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information
and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display. Use
the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and
the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Constant Display
MENU
Drive Mode
Detailed Monitor Constant
Display
Power ON
DATA
ENTER
Frequency reference
Frequency reference setting/
display unit o1-03
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Monitor Display
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Output frequency
ESC
Output current
ESC
Monitor setting for o1-01
ESC
Status Monitor
RESET
Frequency reference
DATA
ENTER
Fan operating time
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
Error Trace
ESC
Current error
RESET
ESC
ESC
ESC
Operating time at error
ESC
Fault History
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Operating time at 4th
previous error
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
ESC
1st previous error
RESET
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IM P O R T A N T
F7 Instruction Manual
3-7
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter test run can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the constants. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting, the user constant will be
written into the memory, and the display will return to the constant monitor automatically.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
3-8
F7 Instruction Manual
Monitor
Display
Constant
Monitor
Mode Selection Display
Display
Setting Display
MENU
Quick Programming Mode
Control method selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
Reference selection
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Operation method selection
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Stopping method selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
C1-01: Acceleration time 1
C1-02: Deceleration time 1
C6-01: CT/VT selection
C6-02: Carrier frequency
selection
AO CH1 output gain
ESC
d1-01: Frequency reference 1
d1-02: Frequency reference 2
d1-03: Frequency reference 3
d1-04: Frequency reference 4
d1-17: Jog frequency reference
E1-01: Input voltage setting
E1-03: V/f pattern selection
E1-04: Max. output frequency
E1-05: Max. voltage
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-09: Min. output frequency
E1-13: Base voltage (VBASE)
E2-01: Motor rated current
DATA
ENTER
ESC
AO CH2 output gain
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Motor protection selection
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Deceleration stall selection
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
F7 Instruction Manual
3-9
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. When the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting, the user constant will be
written into memory and the display will return to constant monitor automatically. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
3-10
F7 Instruction Manual
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Function Selection Display
Constant
Monitor
Monitor
DisplayDisplay
Setting Display
MENU
DATA
ENTER
Advanced Programming Mode
RESET
Setup settings: A1-xx
Language
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Access level
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Control mode selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET
PID control mode selection
PID control: b5-xx
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
Proportional gain
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
PID feedback command
loss detection time
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET
Torque limits: L7-xx
Forward torque limit
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
Reverse torque limit
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Reverse regenerative torque limit
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET
Copy functions: o3-xx
Copy function selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
Read permitted selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
F7 Instruction Manual
3-11
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Table 3.3 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
3-12
Digital Operator Display
Description
1
Power supply turned ON.
2
MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
3
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
4
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
5
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
6
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
7
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting
display. The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is displayed.
8
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing
digit to the right.
9
Increment Key pressed to change set value to
20.00 s.
10
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set
data. “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the
entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.
F7 Instruction Manual
Step
No.
11
F7 Instruction Manual
Digital Operator Display
Description
Returns to the monitor display for C1-01 automatically.
3-13
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming
mode or by auto tuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment modes
settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming modes.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the constants. When the DATA/ENTER key is
pressed after changing the setting, the user constant will be written into memory and the display will return to constant monitor automatically.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default
settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and E2-01
(Motor Rated Current).
Monitor Display
Mode Selection Display
Setting Display
MENU
Verify Mode
Frequency reference
selection
DATA
ENTER
Frequency reference
selection
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 1
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Input voltage setting
Input voltage setting
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
3-14
F7 Instruction Manual
Auto tuning Mode
Auto tuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the open-loop or flux vector control modes. Always perform auto tuning before starting operation.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary auto tuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary auto tuning. To set motor constants by
calculation, contact your Yaskawa representatives.
The Inverter's auto tuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system's auto tuning function determines the size of a load, so these auto tuning functions are fundamentally different.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of poles
specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run and the
motor constants measured based on these settings and auto tuning will be set.
Always set all of the above items. Auto tuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage display.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the constants. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting, the user constant will be
written into memory and the display will return to constant monitor automatically.
The following example shows auto tuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without switching to motor 2.
F7 Instruction Manual
3-15
MENU
Autotuning Monitor Display
Tuning mode
Autotuning
Setting Display
Tuning mode:
rotational tuning
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Motor output power
ESC
Motor output power
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Motor rated voltage
ESC
Motor rated voltage
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Motor rated current
ESC
Motor rated current
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Motor base frequency
ESC
Motor base frequency
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
No. of motor poles
ESC
No. of motor poles
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Motor base speed
ESC
Motor base speed
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Autotuning
Autotuning start*
Stop command input
RUN
ESC
ESC
Autotuning completed
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational auto tuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary auto tuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when auto tuning starts.
Fig 3.8 Operation in Auto tuning Mode
If a fault occurs during auto tuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
IM P O R T A N T
3-16
F7 Instruction Manual
Test Run
This chapter describes the procedures for test run of the Inverter and provides an example of trial
operation.
Test Run ....................................................................... 4-2
Test Run Operation ...................................................... 4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ........................................... 4-17
F7 Instruction Manual
4-1
Test Run Procedure
Perform test run according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic user constants, always set C6-01
(CT/VT Selection) according to the application.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage. *1
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Select operating
method.
NO
Open-loop vector control (A1-02 = 2)
V/f control?
YES
YES
A1-02 = 1
PG?
NO
Default: A1-02 = 0
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
*2
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Settings according
to control mode
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall or
overload?
YES
OK to operate
*3
motor during autotuning?
NO
YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for *4
line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning
Stationary autotuning
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
*1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.
No-load operation
*2 If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings
*3 Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
*4 If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
Check/record constants.
END
Fig 4.1 Test Run Flowchart
4-2
F7 Installation Manual
Test Run Operation
The operation for the test run is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter.
• Fan, blower, pump
• Other equipment
For any Inverter application other than a fan, blower, or pump, set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) to 0 (CT: low carrier,
constant torque). The default setting is 1 (VT: high carrier, variable torque).
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or
Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply
voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tab
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
Jumper (factory-set position)
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Large-capacity Inverter Connections
F7 Instruction Manual
4-3
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
• Make sure the option cards are connected properly, if applicable.
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Display for normal operation
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer
to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
Display for fault operation
4-4
The display will differ depending on the
type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
F7 Installation Manual
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then set
the following user constants.
Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 User
Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user constants.
Table 4.1 Basic Constant Settings
u: Must be set. w: Set as required.
Class
u
u
u
Constant
Number
A1-02
b1-01
b1-02
Name
Description
Control method
selection
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Operation
method selection
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Select stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to 2
0
5-8
1
5-11
6-6
6-66
6-84
0 to 3
1
5-11
6-12
6-66
6-84
0 to 3
0
5-11
6-15
0 to 4
w
b1-03
Stopping method
selection
u
C1-01
Set the acceleration time in seconds for
Acceleration time
the output frequency to climb from 0% to
1
100%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-18
6-20
u
C1-02
Set the deceleration time in seconds for
Deceleration time
the output frequency to fall from 100% to
1
0%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-18
6-20
C6-01
Set to CT (not low noise, maximum current/overload: 150%) or VT (low noise,
maximum current/overload:120%).
0: CT
1: VT
0 or 1
1
5-23
6-2
u
F7 Instruction Manual
CT/VT selection
4-5
Table 4.1 Basic Constant Settings (Continued)
u: Must be set. w: Set as required.
Class
w
w
u
Constant
Number
C6-02
E1-01
E2-01
w
H4-02
and H405
w
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to F
Depends
on setting
of C6-01.
5-23
0 to 400.00 Hz
d1-01 to
d1-04:
0.00 Hz
d1-17:
6.00 Hz
5-24
5-25
6-9
Input voltage set- Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage
ting
in volts.
155 to 255 V
(200 V class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V class)
200 V
(200 V
class)
400 V
(400 V
class)
5-28
6-110
Motor rated current
Setting for
general10% to 200%
purpose
of Inverter's
motor of
rated current
same
capacity
as Inverter
Carrier frequency selection
Description
The carrier frequency is set low if the
motor cable is 50 m or longer or to
reduce radio noise or leakage current.
The factory setting and setting range
depends on the setting of C6-01.
Frequency referd1-01 to
ences 1 to 4 and Set the required speed references for
d1-04 and
jog frequency ref- multi-step speed operation or jogging.
d1-17
erence
u
u
Setting
Range
Name
Set the motor rated current.
FM and AM ter- Adjust when an instrument is connected
minal output gain to the FM or AM terminal.
L1-01
Motor protection
selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
L3-04
Stall prevention
selection during
deceleration
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and
Braking Units), be sure to set constant
L3-04 to 0 (disabled) or 3 (enabled with
braking resistor).
5-29
6-50
6-108
0.00 to 2.50
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
5-44
0 to 3
1
5-48
6-50
0 to 3
1
5-50
6-27
When C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), non-low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be
150% of the Inverter rating per minute. When C6-01 is set to 1 (VT), low noise will apply and the Inverter
overload withstand ratio will be 120% of the Inverter rating per minute. If C6-01 is set to 1 (VT) when
I M P O R T Aoverload
N T
withstand capability is required by the application, the life of the Inverter may be reduced.
If the wires between the inverter and the motor are long, the high frequency leakage current from the cable will
increase, which will cause the inverter output current to increase and may affect the peripheral units adversely.
4-6
F7 Installation Manual
In such a case, adjust the carrier frequency according to Table 4.2 for detailed information, refer to Chapter 5
“User Constant List”.
Table 4.2 Wiring Distance Between Inverter and Motor
Wiring Distance between
Inverter and Motor
Less than 50m
Less than 100M
Over 100m
Carrier Frequency
15 kHz or less
10 kHz or less
5 kHz or less
C6-02 Setting
0~6
0~4
0~2
Note: The setting range at C6-02 depends on C6-01 setting. Reducing the carrier frequency setting is also
effective for reducing radio noise.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-7
Settings for the Control Methods
Auto tuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the control
method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and auto tuning mode according to the following flowchart.
START
NO
Open-loop vector control (A1-02 = 2)
V/f control?
YES
A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Control mode selection
PG?
YES
A1-02 = 1
NO
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall
or overload?
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
YES
*2
OK to operate
motor during autotuning?*1
NO
YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning
Stationary autotuning
END
Note If the motor cable length significantly changes (50 m or more) for the actual installation, perform stationary auto tuning for the line-to-line resistance on-site.
* 1. Use rotational auto tuning to increase auto tuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 from the advanced programming mode.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
4-8
F7 Installation Manual
Setting the Control Method
One of the following three control methods can be selected.
• V/f control without PG (normal variable control)
• V/f control with PG (simple speed feedback control)
• Open-loop vector control (high-performance control without PG)
V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
• Either set one of the fixed V/f patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection), or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern then set a custom V/f pattern to E1-04 through E1-13 from the advanced programming mode as
required.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Perform stationary auto tuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer or the
load is heavy enough to cause stalling. Refer to the following section on Auto tuning for details on stationary
auto tuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
• Either set one of the fixed V/f patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern then set a custom V/f pattern to E1-04 through E1-13 from the advanced programming mode as
required.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the motor and
PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
• Perform stationary auto tuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer or the
load is heavy enough to cause stalling. Refer to the following section on Auto tuning for details on stationary
auto tuning.
Open-loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)
Perform auto tuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational auto tuning. If the motor cannot be operated,
perform stationary auto tuning. Refer to the following section on Auto tuning for details on auto tuning.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-9
Auto tuning
Use the following procedure to perform auto tuning to automatically set motor constants when using the open-loop
vector control method, when the cable length is long, etc.
Setting the Auto tuning Mode
One of the following three auto tuning modes can be selected.
• Rotational auto tuning
• Stationary auto tuning
• Stationary auto tuning for line-to-line resistance only
Rotational Auto tuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotational auto tuning is used only for open loop-vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the nameplate,
and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator to start the auto tuning. The Inverter will automatically set the
reguired motor constants after running/stopping the motor for 1 ~ 2 minutes.
1. Always disconnect the motor from the machine and confirm that it is safe to operate the motor before
performing rotational tightening.
2. If the motor cannot be operated by itself, perform stationary auto tuning, but always use rotational auto
I M P O R T A Ntuning
T
whenever it is possible to increase performance.
Stationary Auto tuning (T1-01 = 1)
Stationary auto tuning is used only for open-vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the nameplate, and
then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator to start the auto tuning. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the required motor constants will be set automatically. The
remaining motor constants will be set automatically at the first operation of motor above 30Hz for 3 seconds in
drive mode.
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary auto tuning is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until auto tuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary auto tuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
I M P O R T A Nholding
T
brake is not activated during auto tuning.
3. Keep the motor load ratio to 30% or less the first time the system is operated in drive mode after performing stationary auto tuning.
4-10
F7 Installation Manual
Stationary Auto tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)
Stationary auto tuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only auto tuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Auto tuning can be used to improve control errors when the motor cable is long or the cable length has changed or
when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
To perform auto tuning in V/f control or V/f control with PG, set T1-01 to 2 for open-loop vector control, and then
press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary auto tuning for line-to-line resistance is performed
even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until auto tuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary auto tuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
I M P O R T A Nholding
T
brake is not disengaged during auto tuning.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-11
Constant Settings for Auto tuning
The following constants must be set before auto tuning.
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Auto tuning
Constant
Number
Name
T1-00
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Motor 1/2
selection
Set the location where the auto tuned
motor constants are to be stored.
1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
1 or 2
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
T1-01
Auto tuning
mode selection
Set the auto tuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning
2: Stationary autotuning for line-toline resistance only
0 to 2
2 (V/f and
V/f with
PG)
0 (openloop vector)*2
Yes
(only
for 2)
Yes
(only
for 2)
Yes
T1-02
Motor output power
Set the output power of the motor in
kilowatts.*3
Same as
Inverter
rated output
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 255.0 V
(200 V class)
0 to 510.0 V
(400 V class)
200.0 V
(200 V
class)
400.0 V
(400 V
class)
-
-
Yes
10% to 200%
of Inverter
rated current*5
Same as
generalpurpose
motor with
same
capacity as
Inverter
Yes
Yes
Yes
60.0 Hz
-
-
Yes
10% to 200%
of Inverter
rated output
*5
T1-03
*
*
*
*
Data Displays during
Auto tuning
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Vector
Motor rated
voltage
Set the rated voltage of the motor in
volts.*3 *4
T1-04
Motor rated
current
Set the rated current of the motor in
amps.*3
T1-05
Motor base
frequency
Set the base frequency of the motor
in hertz.*3 *4
0 to 400.0 Hz
T1-06
Number of
motor poles
Set the number of motor poles.
2 to 48 poles
4 poles
-
-
Yes
T1-07
Motor base
speed
Set the base speed of the motor in
r/min.*3
0 to 24000
1750
r/min
-
-
Yes
*6
*6
Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
Only a setting of 2 (stationary auto tuning for line-to-line resistance only) is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
For a constant-output motor, set the value at the base speed.
For an inverter motor or vector motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the nameplate or
in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better accuracy.
* 5. Stable vector control will be possible when the setting is between 50% and 100%.
* 6. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity and the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT Selection).
4-12
1.
2.
3.
4.
F7 Installation Manual
Digital Operator Displays during Auto tuning
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during auto tuning.
Table 4.4 Digital Operator Displays during Auto tuning
Digital Operator Display
Description
Auto tuning mode selection: T1-01
Using the same procedures as for the programming
modes check and set the T1 constants according to
information on the previous page.
Be sure that T1-01 (Auto tuning Mode Selection) is
set correctly and check safety around the motor and
machine.
Motor base speed: T1-07
(For rotational auto tuning)
The auto tuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-07 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
Auto tuning started: TUn10
Auto tuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed
from the auto tuning start display.
The digit second from the right in TUn is the
Motor 1/2 Selection (T1-00) and the right digit is the
Auto tuning Mode Selection (T1-01).
Auto tuning
Stop command input
If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error
occurs during auto tuning, and error message will be
display and auto tuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Auto tuning on page 7-13.
Auto tuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that auto tuning has been completed.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-13
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital
Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced
programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor over-
heating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz (0% to
90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the
machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
While being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be
OFF).
After confirming safety around the motor and machine, start the Inverter operation from the Digital Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the JOG
Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that
emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in REMOTE
mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be taken before
starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
IN F O
4-14
F7 Installation Manual
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the Digital
Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load
• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
Operation using the Digital Operator
• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• In case a fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of about one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• By changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal
sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-17 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control
system occur.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-15
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check user constants that have
been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been changed by auto tuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function (in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode) can be
used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings
are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if for
any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing test run, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate memory area
in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initialized to the settings
saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1
(User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the machine or
application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will be
displayed only when the correct password is input.
4-16
F7 Installation Manual
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during test run, adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the most commonly
used user constants.
Table 4.5 Adjusted User Constants
Control
Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0
or 1)
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque is insufficient for
heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
200 to 1000
ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Hunting-prevention
gain (N1-02)
Controlling hunting
and vibration in mid1.00
dle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
Carrier frequency
selection
(C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Improving torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
gain (C4-01)
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz
or lower)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
1.00
0.50 to 1.50
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-17
Table 4.5 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
• Improving torque
Speed feedback detecand speed response
tion control (AFR)
• Controlling hunting
1.00
gain
and vibration in mid(N2-01)
dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
Open-loop
vector control (A1-02
= 2)
Open-loop
vector control (A1-02
= 2)
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Improving torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
20 ms
• Improving speed
Slip compensation priresponse
mary delay time (C3200 ms
• Improving speed sta02)
bility
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
20 to
100 ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
100 to
500 ms
• Reduce the setting if speed
response is slow.
• Increase the setting if the
speed is not stable.
0.5 to 1.5
• Increase the setting if
speed is slow.
• Reduce the setting if the
speed is too fast.
Slip compensation
gain (C3-01)
• Improving speed
accuracy
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds (10 Hz or
less)
Depends
on capacity
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low speeds.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
1.0
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-loop
vector control.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control, enable Slip Compensation During
Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and then
adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control is C3-01
= 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR constants (C5-01 to
C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.) ASR for V/
f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for open-loop vector
control, cannot be set.
The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.
4-18
F7 Installation Manual
Table 4.6 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications
Name (Constant Number)
Application
CT/VT selection (C6-01)
Sets the maximum torque and overload capability to 120% or 150%.
DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Used to prevent shock when starting and the completing acceleration and
deceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Used to prevent OV (over voltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using
a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration
by setting L3-04 to 0.
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased,
use an inverter with higher capacity than the motor. If a setting is
reduced, stalling can occur under heavy loads.
F7 Instruction Manual
4-19
Notes:
4-20
F7 Installation Manual
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions ........................................ 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels.......... 5-3
User Constant Tables .................................................. 5-8
F7 Instruction Manual
5-1
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Constant
Number
b1-01
Name
Reference
selection
Setting
Range
Description
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
Change
Facduring
tory
OperaSetting
tion
1
No
• Constant Number:
The number of the user constant.
• Name:
The name of the user constant.
Control Methods
Ope
V/f
n
with Loop
V/f
PG Vector
Q
Q
Q
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
180H
-
• Description:
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range:
The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting:
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-70 for factory settings by control method.
• Change during Operation:
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No:
• Control Methods:
5-2
Changes not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be monitored or set.
Q:
Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.
A:
Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.
No:
Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
• MEMOBUS Register:
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page:
Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.
F7 Instruction Manual
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and
its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum constants required
for operation can be monitored
or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored
or set.
Verify Mode
Constant changed from the
default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor constants if required motor data
(from motor nameplate))
is input for open-loop vector
control or to measure the lineto-line resistance for V/f con-
F7 Instruction Manual
No.
Function
Page
U1
U2
U3
Status Monitor Constants
Fault Trace
Fault History
5-64
5-68
5-70
A1
A2
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
d1
d2
d3
d4
d6
E1
E2
E3
E4
F1
F4
F5
F6
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
N1
N2
N3
o1
o2
o3
Initialize Mode
User-specified Setting Mode
Operation Mode Selections
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
Timer Function
PID Control
Dwell Functions
Energy Saving
Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
Motor Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Control (ASR)
Carrier Frequency
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Reference Frequency Hold
Field Weakening
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 V/f Pattern
Motor 2 Setup
PG Option Setup
Analog Monitor Cards
Digital Output Card
Communications Option Card
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Multi-function Contact Outputs
Analog Inputs
Multi-function Analog Outputs
MEMOBUS Communications
Pulse Train
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethrough
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Reset
Torque Detection
Torque Limits
Hardware Protection
Hunting Prevention Function
Speed Feedback Protection Control
High-slip Braking
Monitor Select
Multi-function Selections
Copy Function
5-8
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-40
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-50
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-57
5-58
5-58
5-59
5-61
5-62
T
Motor Autotuning
5-63
5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode.
The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user
constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-4 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control
method
selection
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
0 to 2
0
No
Q
Q
Q
102H
Reference
selection
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
180H
Operation
method
selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
181H
b1-03
Stopping
method
selection
Select stopping method when stop
command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration time.)
0 to 3
0
No
Q
Q
Q
182H
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
Set the acceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to climb from
0% to 100%.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
200H
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
Set the deceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to fall from
100% to 0%.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
201H
C6-01
CT/VT
selection
No
Q
Q
Q
223H
Constant
Number
A1-02
b1-01
b1-02
5-4
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
RegisV/f with Loop
ter
PG Vector
Setting
Range
Name
0: CT (low carrier, constant torque,
150% per minute)
1: VT (high carrier, variable torque,
120% per minute)
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s
*1
0 or 1
1
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
C6-02
Carrier frequency
selection
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-07.
d1-01
Frequency
reference 1
Set the frequency reference in the unit
specified in o1-03 (Frequency Units
for Reference Setting And Monitor,
default: Hz)
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2
Frequency reference when multi-step
speed command 1 is ON for a multifunction input (unit: Set in o1-03).
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3
Frequency reference when multi-step
speed command 2 is ON for a multifunction input (unit: Set in o1-03).
d1-04
Frequency
reference 4
Factory
Setting
6
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
RegisV/f with Loop
ter
PG Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
224H
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
280H
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
281H
0 to
0.00 Hz
400.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
282H
Frequency reference when multi-step
speed command 1 and 2 are ON for a
multi-function input (unit: Set in o103).
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
283H
d1-17
Jog
frequency
reference
Frequency reference when Jog Frequency Selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON for a multifunction input (unit: Set in o1-03).
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
292H
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This set value will be the basis for the
protection functions.
No
Q
Q
Q
300H
E1-03
V/f pattern
selection
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F:
Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for setting E1-04
to E1-10).
No
Q
Q
No
302H
E1-04
Max. output
frequency
(FMAX)
No
Q
Q
Q
303H
No
Q
Q
Q
304H
No
Q
Q
Q
305H
No
Q
Q
Q
308H
No
A
A
Q
30CH
E1-05
E1-06
Max.
voltage
(VMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
E1-09
Min. output
frequency
(FMIN)
E1-13
Base
voltage
(VBASE)
F7 Instruction Manual
0 to F
155 to
255
*3
0 to F
*2
200 V
*3
F
40.0 to
60.0 Hz
400.0
*5
*4
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VBASE
(E1-13)
0.0 to
255.0
*3
Frequency
(Hz)
VMIN
(E1-10)
FMIN
(E1-09)
FA
FMAX
(E1-06) (E1-04)
Change this setting only when making
advanced adjustments for V/f in the
constant output range. Normally, there
is no need to make these settings.
200.0 V
*3*5
0.0 to
400.0
60.0 Hz
0.0 to
400.0
1.5 Hz
0.0 to
255.0
*3
*5
*5
0.0 V
*6
5-5
Constant
Number
E2-01
5-6
Name
Description
Set the motor rated current in amps.
This set value becomes the base value
Motor rated
for motor protection, torque limit, and
current
torque control. It is set automatically
when using auto tuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
*8
*7
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
RegisV/f with Loop
ter
PG Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
30EH
E2-04
Set the number of motor poles. The
Number of
value is set automatically during automotor poles
tuning.
2 to 48
4
No
No
Q
No
311H
F1-01
Set the number of pulses per rotation
for the PG (pulse generator or
PG constant
encoder) being used. (Do not set as a
multiple.)
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Q
No
380H
H4-02
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 1.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
Gain (termibe output as the 100% output for the
nal FM)
monitor items. Voltage output from the
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
41EH
H4-05
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
Gain (termibe output as the 100% output for the
nal AM)
monitor items. Voltage output from the
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
Q
Q
Q
421H
L1-01
Set to enable or disable the motor
overload protection function using the
electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off
frequently, the thermal value is also
reset; in such cases even if this
constant is set to 1, protection may
not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
each motor is installed with a protection device.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
480H
Motor protection
selection
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
L3-04
Name
Description
0: Disabled (Decel according to the
setting. If deceleration time setting
is too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
Stall preis returned.)
vention
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
selection
(Deceleration rate is automatically
during
adjusted so that in Inverter can
deceleration
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
1
No
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
RegisV/f with Loop
ter
PG Vector
Q
Q
Q
492H
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to 0, the
setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
* 5. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 6. After auto tuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 7. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
F7 Instruction Manual
5-7
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the Digital
Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.
Initialize Mode: A1
User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Language
selection for
Digital Operator display
Select the language displayed on
the Digital Operator (LED).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 6
1
Yes
A
A
A1-01
Constant
access level
Set the constant access level
(set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and
set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and
set in both quick
programming mode and
advanced programming (A)
mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
A
A1-02
Select the control method for the
Inverter
0: V/f control
Control
method selec- 1: V/f with PG feedback
2: Open loop vector
tion
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 2
0
No
Q
A1-00
5-8
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Name
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
100H
-
A
A
101H
6-123
6-124
Q
Q
102H
4-5
4-9
4-17
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
with
n
V/f
PG Loop
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Initialize
Used to initialize the constants
using the specified method.
0:
No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
User constants
2220: Initializes using a twowire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
0 to
3330
0
No
A
A
A1-04
Password
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some constants of the initialize
mode.
If the password is changed, A101 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32
constants can no longer be
changed. (Programming mode
constants can be changed.)
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A1-05
Used to set a four digit number
as the password.
This constant is not usually disPassword set- played. When the Password
ting
(A1-04) is displayed, hold down
the RESET Key and press the
Menu Key and the password
will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A1-03
Name
F7 Instruction Manual
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
103H
-
A
A
104H
6-123
6-124
A
A
105H
6-123
5-9
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Constant
Number
A2-01
to
A2-32
5-10
Name
User setting
constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the constant numbers
that can be set/read. (Maximum
32 Constants).
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to 1
(User Program). Only the Constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can
be set/read in programming
mode.
b1-01 to
o2-08
-
No
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Ope
BUS
V/f
with
n
Register
PG Loop
Page
106H to
125H
6-124
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
Application Constants: b
The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, DC
injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, and energy saving functions.
Operation Mode Selections: b1
User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Reference
selection
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
b1-02
Operation
method selection
Set the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
b1-01
Setting
Range
0 to 4
Factory
Setting
1
Change
during
Operation
No
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Q
Q
Q
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
180H
4-5
6-6
6-66
6-84
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
181H
4-5
6-12
6-66
6-84
b1-03
Set the stopping method when a
stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
Stopping
(Stops faster than coast to
method selecstop, no regenerative
tion
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
0 to 3
0
No
Q
Q
Q
182H
4-5
6-15
b1-04
Prohibition of
reverse operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
183H
6-55
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
185H
-
b1-06
Read
sequence
input twice
F7 Instruction Manual
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Set the responsiveness of the
control inputs (forward/reverse
and multi-function inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms (Use
for fast responses.)
1: Two scans every 5 ms (Use
for possible malfunction due
to noise.)
5-11
Constant
Number
Name
Description
b1-07
Set the operation mode after
switching to the Remote mode
using the Local/Remote Key.
0: Run signals that are input
Operation
during mode switching are
selection after
disregarded. ( Run signal
switching to
must be turned OFF, then
remote mode
turned ON to operate).
1: Run signals become
effective immediately after
switching to the Remote
mode.
b1-08
Run command selection in
programming modes
Set an operation interlock in
programming modes.
0: Operation Disabled.
1: Operation Enabled (Disabled
when Digital Operator is set
to select run command
(when b1-02 = 0).
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
with
n
V/f
PG Loop
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
186H
-
A
187H
-
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
DC Injection Braking: b2
User constants for injection braking are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
b2-01
Zero speed
level (DC
injection
braking starting frequency)
Set the DC injection braking
starting frequency in units of Hz
when deceleration to stop is
selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09,
E1-09 becomes the DC injection
braking starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
189H
6-15
b2-02
DC injection
braking current
Sets the DC injection braking
current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
18AH
6-15
6-18
DC injection
braking time
at start
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at start in
units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and
restart it. When the set value is
0, DC injection braking at start
is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
18BH
6-18
DC injection
braking time
at stop
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at stop in
units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after
the stop command is input.
When the set value is 0.00, DC
injection braking at stop is not
performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
18CH
6-15
b2-03
b2-04
5-12
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Setting
Range
F7 Instruction Manual
Speed Search: b3
User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
MEMOBUS
V/f
Ope
RegisV/f
with
n
ter
PG Loop
Page
No
A
A
A
191H
6-57
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
2*
Enables/disables the speed search
function for the run command and
sets the speed search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
b3-01
Speed
search
selection
(current
detection or
speed calculation)
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the
maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search
current level.
b3-02
Speed
search operating current
(current
detection)
Sets the speed search operation
current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
Not usually necessary to set. When
restarting is not possible with the
factory settings, reduce the value.
0 to
200
120%*
No
A
No
A
192H
6-57
b3-03
Speed
search
deceleration time
(current
detection)
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in
1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration from
the maximum output frequency to
the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
193H
6-57
b3-05
Speed
search wait
time (current detection or
speed calculation)
Sets the contactor operating delay
time when there is a contactor on
the output side of the Inverter.
When a speed search is performed
after recovering from a momentary
power loss, the search operation is
delayed by the time set here.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
195H
6-57
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
F7 Instruction Manual
5-13
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
b4-01
b4-02
5-14
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
Timer function ONdelay time
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1second units.
Enabled when a timer function
is set in H1- or H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1A3H
6-96
Timer function OFFdelay time
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1second units.
Enabled when a timer function
is set in H1- or H2-
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1A4H
6-96
F7 Instruction Manual
PID Control: b5
User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
0
No
A
A
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
1A5H
6-99
b5-01
PID control
mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is
D-controlled.)
3: Enabled (frequency reference + PID output, D control
of deviation)
4: Enabled (frequency reference + PID output, D control
of feedback value).
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain
as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
1A6H
6-88
b5-03
Integral (I)
time
Sets I-control integral time in 1second units.
I-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
1A7H
6-99
b5-04
Integral (I)
limit
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
1A8H
6-99
b5-05
Derivative
(D) time
Sets D-control derivative time in
1-second units.
D-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
1A9H
6-99
b5-06
PID limit
Sets the limit for PID-control as
a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
1AAH
6-99
b5-07
PID offset
adjustment
Sets the offset after PID-control
as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
1ABH
6-99
b5-08
PID primary
delay time
constant
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control outputs in 1-second units.
Not usually necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
1ACH
6-99
b5-09
PID output
characteristics selection
Select forward/reverse for PID
output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(reverses the output sign)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
1ADH
6-99
b5-10
PID output
gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
1AEH
6-99
PID reverse
output selection
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is
negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is
selected using b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
1AFH
6-99
b5-11
F7 Instruction Manual
5-15
Constant
Number
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
with
n
V/f
PG Loop
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: No detection of loss of PID
feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Operation continues during
detection, with the fault
contact not activated.
2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault contact is
activated.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
0 to 100
0%
No
A
Name
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
1B0H
6-99
A
A
1B1H
6-99
b5-12
Selection of
PID feedback command loss
detection
b5-13
PID feedback command loss
detection
level
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level as a percent of
the maximum output frequency.
b5-14
PID feedback command loss
detection
time
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection time in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B2H
6-99
b5-15
PID sleep
function
operation
level
Set the PID sleep function start
frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
1B3H
6-99
b5-16
PID sleep
operation
delay time
Set the delay time at the start of
the PID sleep function in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B4H
6-99
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference
Set the accel/decel time for PID
reference in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B5H
6-99
Dwell Functions: b6
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Dwell freb6-01 quency at
start
b6-02
Chang
SetFace durting
tory
ing
Range Setting Operation
Description
ON
Run command
OFF
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Time
b6-04
The dwell function is used to hold the
Dwell time frequency temporarily when driving a
b6-04
motor with a heavy load.
at stop
5-16
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Ope
n
Loop
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
1B6H
6-24
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B7H
6-24
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
1B8H
6-24
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B9H
6-24
Output frequency
Dwell time
at start
Dwell freb6-03 quency at
stop
Control Methods
F7 Instruction Manual
Energy Saving: b8
User constants for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
No
A
A
Yes
No
Yes
*4
b8-01
Energy-saving mode
selection
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
b8-02
Energy-saving gain
Set the energy-saving gain with
the open loop vector control
method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
b8-03
Energy-savSet the energy-saving filter time
ing filter time constant with the open loop vecconstant
tor control method.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
*1
*2
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
1CCH
-
No
A
1CDH
-
No
No
A
1CEH
-
No
A
A
No
1CFH
-
Energy-saving coefficient
Set the value for the maximum
motor efficiency.
Set the motor rated capacity in
E2-11, and adjust the value by
5% at a time until output power
reaches a minimum value.
655.00*
b8-05
Power detection filter
time constant
Set the time constant for output
power detection.
0 to
2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
1D0H
-
b8-06
Set the limit value of the voltage
control range during search
operation.
Perform search operation to
Search operaoptimize operations using
tion voltage
minute variations in voltage
limiter
using energy-saving control. Set
to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the motor base
voltage.
0 to 100
0%
No
A
A
No
1D1H
-
b8-04
*
*
*
*
Name
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Setting
Range
1.
2.
3.
4.
0.0 to
3
The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-17
Auto tuning Constants: C
The following settings are made with the auto tuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times, scurve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency functions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
5-18
Name
Description
C1-01
Acceleration
time 1
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency, in 1-second units.
Yes
Q
Q
C1-02
Deceleration
time 1
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum
output frequency to 0, in 1-second units.
Yes
Q
C1-03
Acceleration
time 2
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
C1-04
Deceleration
time 2
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” is set to ON.
C1-05
Acceleration
time 3
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/
decel time 2” is set to ON.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
6000.0*
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Constant
Number
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
Q
200H
4-5
6-20
Q
Q
201H
4-5
6-20
A
A
A
202H
6-20
Yes
A
A
A
203H
6-20
No
A
A
A
204H
6-20
No
A
A
A
205H
6-20
10.0 s
C1-06
Deceleration
time 3
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/
decel time 2” is set to ON.
C1-07
Acceleration
time 4
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” and “accel/decel
time 2” are set to ON.
No
A
A
A
206H
6-20
C1-08
Deceleration
time 4
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” and “accel/decel
time 2” are set to ON.
No
A
A
A
207H
6-20
C1-09
Emergency
stop time
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “Emergency (fast) stop” is set to ON.
This is also used if “Emergency
(fast) stop is selected as the stopping method when a fault is
detected.
No
A
A
A
208H
6-19
C1-10
Accel/decel
time setting
unit
No
A
A
A
209H
6-20
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0 or 1
1
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
C1-11
Name
Description
Sets the frequency for automatic
switching of the acceleration/
deceleration time.
Below set frequency: Accel/
Accel/decel
decel time 4
time switchAbove set frequency: Accel/
ing frequency
decel time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” or “accel/decel
time 2” take priority.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
with
n
V/f
PG Loop
A
A
A
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
20AH
-
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration
times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
S-curve
characterisC2-01 tic time at
acceleraAll sections of the S-curve characteristic
tion start
time are set in seconds units.
When the S-curve characteristic time is
S-curve
characteris- set, the accel/decel times will increase by
half of the S-curve characteristic times at
C2-02 tic time at
start and end.
accelera-
Change
SetFacduring
ting
tory
OperaRange Setting
tion
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f with
n
PG Loop
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
20BH
-
A
A
20CH
-
A
A
A
20DH
-
A
A
A
20EH
-
tion end
C2-03
C2-04
S-curve
characteristic time at
deceleration start
S-curve
characteristic time at
deceleration end
F7 Instruction Manual
Run command
Output frequency
C2-01
OFF
ON
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
Time
5-19
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
User constants for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Change
during
Operation
0.0*
Yes
A
No
No
A
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
20FH
4-18
6-37
No
A
210H
4-18
6-37
A
No
A
211H
6-37
No
A
No
A
212H
6-37
No
No
No
A
213H
6-37
Name
Description
Slip compensation gain
Used to improve speed accuracy
when operating with a load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• When actual speed is low,
increase the setting.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the setting.
0.0 to
2.5
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay
time
Slip compensation primary
delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• Reduce the setting when slip
compensation response is
slow.
• When speed is not stabilized,
increase the setting.
0 to
10000
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Sets the slip compensation limit
as a percentage of motor rated
slip.
0 to
250
200%
No
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during
regeneration
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
during regeneration function has
been activated, as regeneration
capacity increases momentarily,
it may be necessary to use a
braking option (braking resistor,
Braking Resistor Unit or Braking Unit.)
0 or 1
0
C3-05
Output voltage limit
operation
selection
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)
0 or 1
0
C3-01
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
2000 ms
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
5-20
F7 Instruction Manual
Torque Compensation: C4
User constants for are torque compensation shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
C4-01
Torque compensation
gain
Sets torque compensation gain
as a ratio.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
motor capacity), increase the
set values.
• When the motor is oscillating,
decrease the set values.
Adjust the setting so that the
output current range at low
speed rotation does not exceed
the Inverter rated output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its default
(1.00) when using the open loop
vector control method.
0.00 to
2.50
C4-02
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Torque com- Adjust in the following circumpensation pri- stances:
• When the motor is oscillating,
mary delay
increase the set values.
time constant
• When the responsiveness of
the motor is low, decrease the
set values.
0 to
10000
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1.00
Yes
A
A
No
A
A
200 ms
*
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
215H
4-18
6-41
A
216H
4-17
6-41
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
F7 Instruction Manual
5-21
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.
Change
SetFacduring
ting
tory
OperaRange Setting
tion
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Sets the proportional gain of the speed
loop (ASR.)
0.00 to
300.00
0.20
Yes
No
A
C5-02
ASR inteSets the integral time of the speed loop
gral (I) time
(ASR) in 1-second units.
1
0.000
to
10.000
0.200
s
Yes
No
C5-03
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
0.00 to
300.00
0.02
Yes
0.000
to
10.000
0.050
s
0.0 to
20.0
5.0%
Constant
Number
Name
C5-01
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
Description
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
No
21BH
-
A
No
21CH
-
No
A
No
21DH
-
Yes
No
A
No
21EH
-
No
No
A
No
21FH
-
P I
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
C5-04
C5-05
5-22
ASR integral (I) time
2
ASR limit
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0
E1-04
Motor speed (Hz)
Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed control
loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
F7 Instruction Manual
Carrier Frequency: C6
User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
C6-01
CT/VT
selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency
selection
C6-03
Carrier
frequency
upper limit
C6-04
Carrier
frequency
lower limit
Description
Change
SetFacduring
ting
tory
OperaRange Setting
tion
0: CT (low carrier, constant torque,
150% per minute)
1: VT (high carrier, variable torque,
120% per minute)
0 or 1
Select a carrier frequency preset pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-07.
0 to F
Set the carrier frequency upper limit
and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
With the vector control method, the
upper limit of the carrier frequency is
fixed in C6-03.
Carrier frequency
1
6
*1
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *3
*1
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *3
*1
00 to
99
00
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
No
Q
Q
Q
223H
4-5
6-2
No
Q
Q
Q
224H
4-5
4-19
6-2
No
A
A
A
225H
6-2
No
A
A
No
226H
6-2
No
A
A
No
227H
6-2
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
frequency
(Max. output frequency)
C6-05
Carrier frequency proportional
gain
K is a coefficient that depends on the
setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
*3
* 1. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. This constant can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-23
Reference Constants: d
The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Frequency references.
Preset Reference: d1
User constants for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
5-24
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
d1-01
Frequency
reference 1
Sets the frequency reference in
the units used in o1-03.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
280H
4-6
6-11
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 1 is
ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
281H
4-6
6-11
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 2 is
ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
282H
4-6
6-11
d1-04
Frequency
reference 4
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1
and 2 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
283H
4-6
6-11
d1-05
Frequency
reference 5
The frequency when multi-step
speed command 3 is ON for a
multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
284H
6-11
d1-06
Frequency
reference 6
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1
and 3 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
285H
6-11
d1-07
Frequency
reference 7
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 2
and 3 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
286H
6-11
d1-08
Frequency
reference 8
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1, 2,
and 3 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
287H
6-11
d1-09
Frequency
reference 9
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 4 is
ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
288H
-
d1-10
Frequency
reference 10
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1
and 4 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28BH
-
d1-11
Frequency
reference 11
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 2
and 4 are ON for a multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28CH
-
0 to
400.00
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
with
n
V/f
PG Loop
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
d1-12
Frequency
reference 12
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1, 2,
and 4 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28DH
-
d1-13
Frequency
reference 13
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 3
and 4 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28EH
-
d1-14
Frequency
reference 14
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1, 3,
and 4 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28FH
-
d1-15
Frequency
reference 15
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 2, 3,
and 4 are ON for multi-function
inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
290H
-
d1-16
Frequency
reference 16
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1, 2,
3, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
291H
-
d1-17
The frequency reference when
Jog frequency the jog frequency reference
reference
selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON.
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
292H
4-6
6-74
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
0 to
400.00
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).
Reference Limits: d2
User constants for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
d2-01
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Frequency
reference
upper limit
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
A
A
289H
6-35
6-69
d2-02
Frequency
reference
lower limit
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
28AH
6-35
6-69
d2-03
Master speed
reference
lower limit
Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
293H
6-35
6-69
F7 Instruction Manual
5-25
Jump Frequencies: d3
User constants for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
Description
Setting
Range
0.0 to
400.0
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
Set the center values of the jump
frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by setting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited except during acceleration and deceleration for smooth speed change.
d3-04
Sets the jump frequency bandJump frewidth in Hz.
quency width The jump frequency width will
be the jump frequency ± d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
0.0 Hz
No
1.0 Hz
No
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
A
294H
6-28
A
A
295H
6-28
A
A
A
296H
6-28
A
A
A
297H
6-28
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
User constants for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
d4-01
d4-02
5-26
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Frequency
reference
hold function
selection
Sets whether or not the frequency reference during hold
will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at the
previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when
the multi-function inputs “accel/
decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
298H
6-68
+ - Speed
limits
Set the frequency to be add to or
subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percent of
the maximum output frequency.
Enabled when the increase (+)
speed command or decrease (-)
speed command is set for a
multi-function input.
0 to 100
10%
No
A
A
A
299H
6-72
F7 Instruction Manual
Field Weakening: d6
User constants for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
d6-01
d6-02
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Field weakening level
Set the Inverter output voltage
when the field weakening command is input.
It is enabled when the field
weakening command is set for a
multi-function input.
Set the level as a percentage of
voltage set in the V/f pattern.
0 to 100
80%
No
A
A
Field
frequency
Set the lower limit in hertz of the
frequency range where field
control is valid.
The field weakening command
is valid only at frequencies
above this setting and only when
the speed is in agreement with
the current speed reference.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
Name
F7 Instruction Manual
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
No
2A0H
-
No
2A1H
-
5-27
Motor Constant Constants: E
The following settings are made with the motor constant constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor
constants.
V/f Pattern: E1
User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This setting is used as a reference value
in protection functions.
E1-03
V/f pattern
selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F:
Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings E1-04
to E1-10.)
E1-04
Max. output
frequency
E1-01
Base
frequency
E1-07
Mid. output
frequency
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
5-28
No
Q
Q
No
Q
No
*1
0 to F
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
Mid. output
line, set the same values for E1-07 and
frequency
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1voltage
08 will be disregarded.
Min. output Always ensure that the four frequencies
are set in the following manner:
frequency
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
Min. output (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
frequency
voltage
F
*1
*1*2
0.0 to
400.0
60.0 Hz
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
0.0 to
15.0 V
255 *1
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
400.0
E1-12
Mid. output
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the outfrequency
put range. Normally, this setting is not
voltage 2
required.
0.0 to
255.0
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
*1
200.0
V
Mid. output
frequency 2
Base
voltage
200 V
0.0 to
255.0
E1-11
E1-13
*
*
*
*
*
155 to
255
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
Q
300H
4-6
6-110
Q
No
302H
6-110
Q
Q
Q
303H
6-110
No
Q
Q
Q
304H
6-110
No
Q
Q
Q
305H
6-110
No
A
A
A
306H
6-110
No
A
A
A
307H
4-18
6-110
No
Q
Q
Q
308H
6-110
No
A
A
A
309H
4-17
4-18
6-110
No
A
A
A
30AH
6-110
No
A
A
A
30BH
6-110
No
A
A
Q
30CH
6-110
*5
Max.
voltage
E1-06
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
40.0 to
60.0 Hz
400.0
*2
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
Change
SetFacduring
ting
tory
OperaRange Setting
tion
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*1
*2
*2
*1 *2
1.5 Hz
*2
9.0 V
*1 *2
0.0 Hz
*3
0.0 V
*3
0.0 V
*4
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
F7 Instruction Manual
Motor Setup: E2
User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
Motor rated
current
Sets the motor rated current in 1
A units.
This set value will become the
reference value for motor protection, torque limits and torque
control.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
E2-02
Motor rated
slip
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
This set value will become the
reference value for slip compensation.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
E2-03
Motor noload current
Sets the motor no-load current in
1 A units.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
E2-04
Number of
motor poles
Sets the number of motor poles.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
2 to 48
E2-05
Motor lineto-line resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
0.000
to
65.000
E2-06
Motor
leakage
inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
0.0 to
40.0
E2-07
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 1
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically
set during tightening.
0.00 to
0.50
E2-08
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 2
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 75% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
0.00 to
0.75
E2-10
Motor iron
loss for
torque compensation
Sets motor iron loss in W units.
0 to
65535
14 W
E2-11
Motor rated
output
Set the rated output of the motor
in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically
set during auto tuning.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
E2-01
*2
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Ope
V/f
with
n
PG Loop
MEMOBUS
Register
Page
No
Q
Q
Q
30EH
6-44
6-108
No
A
A
A
30FH
6-106
6-108
No
A
A
A
310H
6-108
4 poles
No
No
Q
No
311H
6-108
9.842 Ω
No
A
A
A
312H
6-108
No
No
No
A
313H
6-108
0.50
No
No
No
A
314H
6-108
0.75
No
No
No
A
315H
6-108
No
A
A
No
317H
6-108
No
Q
Q
Q
318H
6-108
*1
2.90 Hz
*1
1.20 A
*1
*1
18.2%
*1
*1
*1
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-29
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
User constants for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Motor 2
control
E3-01
method
selection
Description
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
Motor 2
max. outE3-02 put frequency
(FMAX)
Motor 2
mid. outE3-05 put frequency 1
(FB)
Motor 2
mid. output freE3-06
quency
voltage 1
(VC)
Motor 2
min. outE3-07 put frequency
(FMIN)
Motor 2
min. output freE3-08
quency
voltage
(VMIN)
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
319H
-
60.0
Hz
No
A
A
A
31AH
-
No
A
A
A
31BH
-
No
A
A
A
31CH
-
0.0 to 3.0 Hz
*2
400.0
No
A
A
A
31DH
-
0.0 to
11.0 V
255.0
*1
No
A
A
A
31EH
-
0.0 to 0.5 Hz
*2
400.0
No
A
A
A
31FH
-
No
A
A
A
320H
-
40.0 to
400.0
*3
Motor 2
max. voltE3-03
age
(VMAX)
Motor 2
max. voltE3-04 age frequency
(FA)
Setting
Range
Change Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Factory during
Page
BUS
Open
Setting Opera- V/f
with Loop
Register
tion
PG
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
*1
*2
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values
for E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06
will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following
manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) >
E3-05 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN)
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 3. When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
5-30
F7 Instruction Manual
Motor 2 Setup: E4
User constants for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Motor 2
E4-01 rated current
Sets the motor rated current
in 1 A units.
This set value will become
the reference value for motor
protection, torque limits and
torque control.
This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
0.32
1.90 A
to 6.40
*1
Motor 2
rated slip
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
This set value will become
the reference value for slip
compensation.
This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
0.00 to
20.00
E4-02
Sets the motor no-load curMotor 2 no- rent in 1 A units.
E4-03
load current This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
No
A
A
A
321H
6-50
No
A
A
A
322H
-
No
A
A
A
323H
-
*2
0.00 to
1.89
*3
2.90
Hz
*1
1.20 A
*1
Motor 2
number of
E4-04
poles (number of poles)
Sets the number of motor
poles.
This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
2 to 48 4 poles
No
No
A
No
324H
-
Motor 2
E4-05 line-to-line
resistance
Sets the motor phase-tophase resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
No
A
A
A
325H
-
Motor 2
E4-06 leakage
inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as
a percentage of the motor
rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
No
No
No
A
326H
-
Set the rated output of the
Motor 2
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
E4-07 rated capacThis constant is automatiity
cally set during auto tuning.
0.40 to
650.00
0.40
No
A
A
A
327H
-
*1
*1
*1
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1- = 16), the factory setting will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of
0.4 kW is given.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-31
Option Constants: F
The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for Option Cards
PG Option Setup: F1
User constants for the PG Speed Control Card are shown in the following table.
5-32
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses.
F1-01 PG constant Sets the number of pulses
per motor revolution (not set
as a multiple).
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Q
No
380H
6-125
Operation
selection at
F1-02 PG open
circuit
(PGO)
Sets the PG disconnection
stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency
stop using the
deceleration time in C109.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
381H
6-125
Operation
selection at
F1-03
overspeed
(OS)
Sets the stopping method
when an overspeed (OS)
fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency
stop using the
deceleration time in C109.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
382H
6-125
Constant
Number
Name
Description
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
F1-04 selection at
deviation
F1-05
PG rotation
direction
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the stopping method
when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency
stop using the
deceleration time in C109.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and
operation continued.)
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
383H
6-125
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
384H
6-125
1 to
132
1
No
No
A
No
385H
6-125
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
386H
6-126
0: Phase A leads with
forward run command.
(Phase B leads with
reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with
forward run command.
(Phase A leads with
reverse run command.)
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control card pulse
output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
PG division (n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
rate (PG
F1-06
F1-06
n m
pulse monitor)
This constant is only effective when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤
1.
Integral
control
during
F1-07
accel/decel
enable/disable
F7 Instruction Manual
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Sets integral control during
acceleration/deceleration to
either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or
decelerating; it is used at
constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
5-33
Constant
Number
Name
Overspeed
F1-08 detection
level
Overspeed
F1-09 detection
delay time
Description
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set
for F1-08 (set as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency) that continue to
exceed this frequency for the
time set in F1-09 are
detected as overspeed faults.
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
120
115%
No
No
A
No
387H
6-126
0.0 to
2.0
1.0 s
No
No
A
No
388H
6-126
10%
No
No
A
No
389H
6-126
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
38AH
6-126
0
No
No
A
No
38BH
6-126
0
No
No
A
No
38CH
6-126
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
38DH
6-126
Sets the speed deviation
detection method.
0 to 50
Any speed deviation above
the F1-10 set level (set as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1Excessive
11 is detected as a speed
speed deviadeviation.
0.0 to
F1-11 tion detecSpeed deviation is the differ- 10.0
tion delay
ence between actual motor
time
speed and the reference command speed.
Excessive
speed deviaF1-10
tion detection level
Number of
F1-12 PG gear
teeth 1
Number of
F1-13 PG gear
teeth 2
PG opencircuit
F1-14
detection
time
5-34
Sets the number of teeth on
the gears if there are gears
between the PG and the
motor.
Input pulses from PG 60
F1-13
F1-01
F1-12
0 to
1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used
if either of these constants is
set to 0.
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO
will be detected if the detection time continues beyond
the set time.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
0.0 to
10.0
F7 Instruction Manual
Analog Monitor Cards: F4
User constants for the Analog Monitor Card are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 40
2
No
A
A
A
391H
6-77
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
392H
6-77
1 to 40
3
No
A
A
A
393H
6-77
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
A
A
A
394H
6-77
Channel 1
Sets the channel 1 item bias
-10.0 to
F4-05 output mon- to 100%/10 V when the ana10.0
itor bias
log monitor card is used.
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
395H
6-77
Channel 2
Sets the channel 2 item bias
-10.0 to
F4-06 output mon- to 100%/10 V when the ana10.0
itor bias
log monitor card is used.
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
396H
6-77
Constant
Number
Name
Channel 1
F4-01 monitor
selection
F4-02
Channel 1
gain
Channel 2
F4-03 monitor
selection
F4-04
Channel 2
gain
Description
Effective when the Analog
Monitor Card is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1)
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for
outputting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 17, 23, 25, 29,
30, 31, 35 are not used.
When the AO-12 Analog
Monitor Card is used, outputs of ± 10 V are possible.
To output ± 10 V, set F4-07
or F4-08 to 1. When the AO08 Analog Monitor Card is
used, only outputs of 0 to
+10 V are possible.
A meter calibration function
is available.
Analog output signal
F4-07
level for
channel 1
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
397H
-
Analog output signal
F4-08
level for
channel 2
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
398H
6-77
F7 Instruction Manual
5-35
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
User constants for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table.
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Channel 1
F5-01 output
selection
Effective when a Digital
Output Card (DO-02 or DO08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
0
No
A
A
A
399H
6-130
Channel 2
F5-02 output
selection
Effective when a Digital
Output Card (DO-02 or DO08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
1
No
A
A
A
39AH
6-130
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
39BH
6-130
0 to 37
4
No
A
A
A
39CH
6-130
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
39DH
6-130
0 to 37
37
No
A
A
A
39EH
6-130
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
39FH
6-117
Name
Channel 3
F5-03 output
selection
Channel 4
F5-04 output
selection
Channel 5
F5-05 output
selection
Channel 6
F5-06 output
selection
Channel 7
F5-07 output
selection
5-36
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Channel 8
F5-08 output
selection
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
3A0H
6-130
DO-08 outF5-09 put mode
selection
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Card is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
3A1H
6-130
F7 Instruction Manual
Communications Option Cards: F6
User constants for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration stop using
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C109
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
3A2H
-
Input level
of external
error from
F6-02
Communications
Option Card
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
3A3H
-
Stopping
method for
external
F6-03 error from
Communications
Option Card
0: Deceleration stop using
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C109
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
3A4H
-
Trace sampling from
F6-04 Communications
Option Card
-
0 to
60000
0
No
A
A
A
3A5H
-
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
selection
F6-01 after communications error
F7 Instruction Manual
Description
5-37
Terminal Function Constants: H
The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external terminal
functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Terminal S3
Multi-function contact input
H1-01 function
1
selection
0 to 77
24
No
A
A
A
400H
-
Terminal S4
Multi-function contact input
H1-02 function
2
selection
0 to 77
14
No
A
A
A
401H
-
Terminal S5
Multi-function contact input
H1-03 function
3
selection
0 to 77
3 (0)*
No
A
A
A
402H
-
Terminal S6
Multi-function contact input
H1-04 function
4
selection
0 to 77
4 (3)*
No
A
A
A
403H
-
Terminal S7
Multi-function contact input
H1-05 function
5
selection
0 to 77
6 (4)*
No
A
A
A
404H
-
Constant
Number
Name
Description
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
Setting
Value
5-38
Function
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
VecPG
tor
Page
0
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-13
1
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-66
2
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-69
3
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-09 is set to 0, this reference is shared with the master/auxiliary speed
switch.
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
4
Multi-step speed reference 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
5
Multi-step speed reference 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
6
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
7
Accel/decel time 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
8
External base block NO (NO contact: Base block at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-62
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
VecPG
tor
Page
9
External base block NC (NC contact: Base block at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-67
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency on hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-68
B
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C
Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
D
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f control)
No
Yes
No
-
E
Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
No
Yes
No
-
F
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
-
-
-
-
10
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-68
11
Down command (Always set with the up command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-68
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-74
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-74
14
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
7-2
15
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when ON.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
16
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
17
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
18
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function
outputs are set in H1- and H2-.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-96
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-91
1A
Accel/Decel time 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants
other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-124
1C
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-72
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency
reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-72
1E
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-73
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-70
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-91
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-91
32
Multi-step speed command 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-91
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-91
20 to
2F
F7 Instruction Manual
5-39
Setting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
VecPG
tor
Page
60
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
6-59
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from the frequency reference)
Yes
No
Yes
6-59
63
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set by d6-01 and d6-02)
Yes
Yes
No
-
64
External speed search command 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
65
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
66
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
67
Communications test mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
68
High-slip braking (HSB)
Yes
Yes
No
-
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Multi-function contact output
0 to 37
0
No
A
A
A
40BH
-
Terminal P1
function
Multi-function contact outH2-02 selection
put 1
(open collector)
0 to 37
1
No
A
A
A
40CH
-
Terminal P2
function
Multi-function contact outH2-03 selection
put 2
(open collector)
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
40DH
-
Constant
Number
Name
Terminal
M1-M2
H2-01 function
selection
(contact)
Description
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Control Methods
Setting
Value
5-40
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
loop
Vector
Page
0
During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1
Zero-speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
2
Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
3
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
F7 Instruction Manual
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
loop
Vector
Page
4
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
5
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L401, L4-02 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
6
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
7
During DC bus under voltage (UV) detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
8
During base block (ON: during base block)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
9
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
A
Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
B
Over torque/under torque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Over torque/under torque detection at
ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
C
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-62
D
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-64
E
Fault (ON: Fault other than the digital operator communication error CPF00 and CPF01 has
occurred.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
F
Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.)
-
-
-
-
10
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
11
Fault reset command active
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
12
Timer function output
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-96
13
Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
14
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
15
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
16
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
17
Over torque/under torque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
18
Over torque/under torque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
19
Over torque/under torque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
1A
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1B
During base block 2 (OFF: During base block)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1C
Motor selection (Motor 2 selected)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1D
Not used (Set when the terminals are not used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1E
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-63
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-50
20
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
30
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
No
No
Yes
-
37
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
F7 Instruction Manual
5-41
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
H3-02
Frequency Reference
Sets the frequency when 10 V is
Gain
input, as a percentage of the
(Voltage)
maximum output frequency.
(terminal A1)
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
411H
6-29
H3-03
Frequency Reference
Sets the frequency when 0 V is
Bias
input, as a percentage of the
(Voltage)
maximum frequency.
(terminal A1)
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
412H
6-29
H3-08
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
signal level
selection
0: 0 to +10V with lower limit.
1: 0 to - 10V without lower
limit.
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input
using the switch on the control
panel.
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
417H
6-29
H3-09
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
function selection
Select multi-function analog
input function for terminal A2.
Refer to the next table.
0 to 1F
0
No
A
A
A
418H
6-29
H3-10
Frequency Reference
Gain
(Current)
(terminal A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA).
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
419H
6-29
H3-11
Frequency Reference
Bias
(Current)
(terminal A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 14 is 0 V (4 mA).
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
41AH
6-29
H3-12
Analog input
filter time constant
Sets primary delay filter time
constant in seconds for the two
analog input terminal (A1 and
A2).
Effective for noise control etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.00
s
No
A
A
A
41BH
6-29
Terminal A1/
A2 switching
0: Use terminal A1 analog
input as main speed
frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog
input as main speed
frequency reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
41CH
-
H3-13
5-42
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Name
Description
F7 Instruction Manual
H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
Function
Contents (100%)
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
VecPG
tor
3DJH
0
Add to terminal A1
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-29
1
Frequency gain
Frequency reference (voltage) command value
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-29
2
Auxiliary frequency reference (2nd step
Maximum output frequency
analog)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-29
4
Voltage bias
Motor rated voltage (E1-05)
Yes
Yes
No
-
5
Accel/decel change (reduction coefficient)
Set acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 to
C1-08)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-21
6
DC injection braking current
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
7
Over torque/under torque detection
level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-49
8
Stall prevention level during run
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
No
6-45
9
Frequency reference lower limit level
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-35
A
Jump frequency
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-29
B
PID feedback
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
C
PID target value
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
E
Motor temperature input
10 V = 100%
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-54
10
Positive torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
11
Negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
1F
Analog input not used.
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Not used
-
-
-
-
13, 14,
16 to 1F
F7 Instruction Manual
-
5-43
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
1 to 40
2
No
A
A
A
41DH
6-77
Multi-function
analog output 1
Gain
(terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets the number of multiples at
10V to be output as the 100%
output for the monitor item.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
41EH
4-6
6-77
H4-03
Multi-function
analog output 1
Bias
(terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
-10.0 to
+10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
41FH
4-6
H4-04
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
Monitor selection from terminal AM.
(terminal AM)
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
be set. 17, 23, 25, 29, 30, 31, 35
are not used.
1 to 40
3
No
A
A
A
420H
4-6
6-77
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of
10 V to be output as the 100%
output for the monitor items.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
Q
Q
Q
421H
4-6
6-77
Sets the multi-function analog
output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
-10.0 to
+10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
422H
6-77
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
423H
6-77
H4-01
H4-02
H4-05
5-44
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
Monitor selection from terminal FM.
(terminal FM)
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
be set. 17, 23, 25, 29, 30, 31 are
not used.
Multi-function
analog output 2
Gain
(terminal AM)
H4-06
Multi-function
analog output 2
Bias
(terminal AM)
H4-07
Sets the signal output level for
Multi-function
multi-function output 1 (termiAnalog output 2
nal FM)
signal level selec0: 0 to +10 V output
tion
1: 0 to ±10 V output
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
H4-08
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Sets the signal output level for
Multi-function
multi-function output 2 (termiAnalog output 2
nal AM)
signal level selec0: 0 to +10 V output
tion
1: 0 to ±10 V output
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
A
A
A
424H
6-77
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1F
No
A
A
A
425H
6-84
Station
address
Set the Inverter's node address.
H5-02
Communication speed
selection
Set the baud rate for 6CN
MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
426H
6-84
H5-03
Communication parity
selection
Set the parity for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
427H
6-84
H5-04
Stopping
method after
communication error
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
428H
6-84
H5-05
Communication error
detection
selection
Set whether or not a communications time-out is to be detected
as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1*
1
No
A
A
A
429H
6-84
H5-06
Send wait
time
Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
A
A
42AH
6-84
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
42BH
6-84
H5-01
H5-07
RTS control
ON/OFF
Select to enable or disable RTS
control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
0 to 20
*
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-45
Pulse Train I/O: H6
User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
5-46
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
42CH
6-6
6-33
6-99
Set the number of pulses in
hertz, taking the reference to be
100%.
1000 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
42DH
6-6
6-33
Pulse train
input gain
Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse train set in
H6-02 is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
42EH
6-33
H6-04
Pulse train
input bias
Set the input bias when the pulse
train is 0.
-100.0
to 100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
42FH
6-33
H6-05
Pulse train
input filter
time
Set the pulse train input primary
delay filter time constant in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
430H
6-33
H6-06
Pulse train
monitor
selection
Select the pulse train monitor
output items (value of the part of U1-).
There are two types of monitor
items: Speed-related items and
PID-related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
2
Yes
A
A
A
431H
6-80
H6-07
Pulse train
monitor scaling
Set the number of pulses output
when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0,
to make the pulse train monitor
output synchronously to the output frequency.
0 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
432H
6-80
Constant
Number
Name
H6-01
Pulse train
input function
selection
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
H6-03
F7 Instruction Manual
Protection Function Constants: L
The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor selection function,
power loss ride through function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hardware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L1-01
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled
at electric thermal overload
relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
Motor protec- In some applications when the
tion selection Inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset,
so even if this constant is set to
1, protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0
and ensure that each motor is
installed with a protection
device.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
480H
4-6
6-50
L1-02
Sets the electric thermal detection time in minutes.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150%
Motor protecoverload for one minute.
tion time conWhen the motor's overload
stant
capacity is known, also set the
overload capacity protection
time for when the motor is hot
started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
481H
6-50
L1-03
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the input motor
temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection
level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (OH3 on
the Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
482H
6-54
Constant
Number
Name
Alarm operation selection
during motor
overheating
F7 Instruction Manual
Description
5-47
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Name
Description
Setting
Range
L1-04
Motor overheating operation
selection
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the operation detection
level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
483H
6-54
L1-05
Motor temperature input
filter time
constant
Set H3-09 to E and set the primary delay time constant for
motor temperature (thermistor)
inputs in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
484H
6-54
Power Loss Ride through: L2
User constants for power loss ride throughs are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
5-48
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (main circuit
undervoltage (UV) is
detected)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the
power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L2-02
is exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. (Restarts when
power returns during control
operations. Does not detect
main circuit undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
485H
6-56
No
A
A
A
486H
6-56
No
A
A
A
487H
6-56
6-57
L2-01
Momentary
power loss
function
selection
L2-02
Ride through time, when
Momentary
Momentary Power Loss Selecpower loss
tion (L2-01) is set to 1, in units
ride-thru time
of seconds.
L2-03
Sets the Inverter's minimum
base block time in units of one
second, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately
0.7 times the motor secondary
circuit time constant.
When an over current or overvoltage occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection
braking, increase the set values.
Min. base
block time
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
0 to 2.0
0.1 to
5.0
0.1 s
*
0.1 s
*1
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Description
L2-04
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the compleVoltage
tion of a speed search, in units of
recovery time one second.
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
L2-05
Sets the main circuit under voltage (UV) detection level (main
circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit under voltage
detection level.
Under voltage detection
level
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
150 to
210
*2
*1
190 V
*2
L2-06
Sets in seconds the time required
to decelerate from the speed
KEB deceler- where the deceleration at
ation time
momentary power loss command (KEB) is input to zero
speed.
0.0 to
200.0
L2-07
Set in seconds the time to accelMomentary
erate to the set speed after recovrecovery time ery from a momentary power
loss.
0.0 to
25.5
0s
L2-08
Sets as a percent the amount to
reduce the output frequency at
the beginning of deceleration at
momentary power loss (KEB).
Reduction = slip frequency
before KEB operation × L2-08 ×
2
0 to 300
100
Frequency
reduction
gain at KEB
start
0.0 s
*3
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
No
A
A
A
488H
6-56
6-57
No
A
A
A
489H
6-49
No
A
A
A
48AH
-
No
A
A
A
48BH
-
No
A
A
A
48CH
-
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
F7 Instruction Manual
5-49
Stall Prevention: L3
User constants for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
L3-01
Stall prevention selection
during accel
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration starts
again when the current is
returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
48FH
6-24
L3-02
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1
or 2.
Stall preven- Set as a percentage of Inverter
tion level dur- rated current.
0 to 200
ing accel
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor stalls.
120%
*
No
A
A
A
490H
6-24
L3-03
Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a
Stall prevenpercentage of the Inverter rated
tion limit dur0 to 100
current, when operation is in the
ing accel
frequency range above E1-06.
Usually setting is not necessary.
50%
No
A
A
A
491H
6-24
1
No
Q
Q
Q
492H
4-6
6-27
L3-04
5-50
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Stall prevention selection
during decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
mode (Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so
that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time setting.
Deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always
set to 0 or 3.
0 to 3
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
No
A
A
No
493H
6-45
No
A
A
No
494H
6-45
Name
Description
Setting
Range
L3-05
Stall prevention selection
during running
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With
a heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C102.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C104.)
0 to 2
1
L3-06
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the
Stall prevenInverter rated current.
tion level durUsually setting is not necessary.
ing running
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor stalls.
30 to
200
120%
*
* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be 150%.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-51
Reference Detection: L4
User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Speed agreement detection
level
Effective when "Desired frequency (ref/setting) agree 1,"
"Frequency detection 1," or
"Frequency detection 2" is set
for a multi-function output.
Frequencies to be detected are
set in Hz units.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
499H
-
Speed agreement detection
width
Effective when "Frequency
(speed) agree 1," "Desired frequency (speed) agree 1," or
"Frequency (FOUT) detection
1," is set for a multi-function
output.
Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
49AH
-
Speed agreement detection
level (+/-)
Effective when "Desired frequency (speed) agree 2,"
"Desired frequency (speed)
agree 1" "Frequency (FOUT)
detection 3," or "Frequency
(FOUT) detection 4" is set for a
multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is set
in Hz units.
-400.0
to
+400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
49BH
-
L4-04
Speed agreement detection
width (+/-)
Effective when "Frequency
(speed) agree 2," "Desired frequency (speed) agree 1," or
"Frequency detection 4" is set
for a multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is set
in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
49CH
-
L4-05
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
Operation when
continues. (At 80% of speed
frequency refbefore the frequency
erence is missreference was lost)
ing
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference dropped over
90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
49DH
6-62
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
5-52
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Name
Description
F7 Instruction Manual
Fault Restart: L5
User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
L5-01
L5-02
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Number of
auto restart
attempts
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a
fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
No
A
A
A
49EH
6-63
Auto restart
operation
selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault
restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is
not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
49FH
6-63
F7 Instruction Manual
5-53
Torque Detection: L6
User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
5-54
Name
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
detection (warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
5: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
detection (warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
4A1H
6-47
0 to 300
150%
No
A
A
A
4A2H
6-47
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
4A3H
6-47
L6-01
Torque
detection
selection 1
L6-02
Open loop vector control: Motor
Torque detec- rated torque is set as 100%.
tion level 1
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
L6-03
Sets the over torque/under
Torque detectorque detection time in section time 1
onds.
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
Name
Description
Torque detection selection
Output of torque detection 1 is
2
enabled by setting 17 for H2Torque detec- and output of torque detection 1 is enabled by setting 18 or
tion level 2
19 for H2-.
Torque detection time 2
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
4A4H
6-47
0 to
300
150%
No
A
A
A
4A5H
6-47
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
4A6H
6-47
Torque Limits: L7
User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
L7-01
L7-02
Name
Description
Forward
drive torque
Sets the torque limit value as a percentlimit
age of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Reverse
drive torque
Output torque
limit
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
4A7H
6-43
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
4A8H
6-43
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
4A9H
6-43
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
4AAH
6-43
Positive torque
L7-03
L7-04
Forward
regenerative torque
limit
Reverse
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Reverse
regenerative torque
limit
Forward
Negative torque
Hardware Protection: L8
User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type
ERF)
L8-02
Sets the detection temperature
for the Inverter overheat detecOverheat pre- tion pre-alarm in °C.
alarm level
The pre-alarm detects when the
cooling fin temperature reaches
the set value.
F7 Instruction Manual
Description
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
4ADH
6-64
50 to
130
95 °C*
No
A
A
A
4AEH
6-65
5-55
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
4AFH
6-65
Input openphase protection selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input
power supply open-phase,
power supply voltage
imbalance or main circuit
electrostatic capacitor
deterioration occurs.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
4B1H
-
L8-07
Output openphase protection selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Output open-phase
detected at less than 5% of
Inverter rated current.)
When applied motor capacity is
small for Inverter capacity, output open-phase may be falsely
detected. In this case, set to 0.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
4B3H
-
L8-09
Ground protection selection
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4B5H
-
L8-10
Set the ON/OFF control for the
Cooling fan
cooling fan.
control selec0: ON only during operation
tion
1: ON whenever power is ON
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
4B6H
-
L8-11
Cooling fan
control delay
time
0 to 300
60 s
No
A
A
A
4B7H
-
L8-12
Ambient temSet the ambient temperature.
perature
45 to 60
45 °C*
No
A
A
A
4B8H
-
L8-15
OL2 characteristics
selection at
low speeds
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds enabled.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4BBH
-
L8-19
Soft CLA
selection
0: Disable (gain = 0)
1: Enable
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4BFH
-
Constant
Number
L8-03
L8-05
Name
Description
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm goes
ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
Operation
1: Coast to stop
selection after
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
overheat preC1-09.
alarm
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0
to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
Set the time in seconds to delay
turning OFF the cooling fan
after the cooling fan OFF command is received.
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-56
F7 Instruction Manual
N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments constants (N constants): Hunting prevention and
speed feedback detection control.
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
User constants for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
N1-01
N1-02
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Hunting-prevention function selection
0: Hunting-prevention function
disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
The hunting-prevention function
suppresses hunting when the
motor is operating with a light
load.
This function is enabled in V/f
control method only.
If high response is to be given
priority over vibration suppression, disable the hunting-prevention function.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
No
580H
6-42
Hunting-prevention gain
Set the hunting-prevention gain
multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light
load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the
setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too suppressed
and the motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
A
A
No
581H
4-17
6-42
F7 Instruction Manual
5-57
Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: N2
User constants for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
Set the internal speed feedback
detection control gain using the
multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the
set value.
• If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No
No
No
A
584H
4-18
6-42
N2-02
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time
constant
Set the time constant to decide
the rate of change in the speed
feedback detection control.
0 to
2000
50 ms
No
No
No
A
585H
6-42
N2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time
constant 2
Set the time constant to decide
the amount of change in the
speed.
0 to
2000
750 ms
No
No
No
A
586H
6-42
Constant
Number
Name
High-slip Braking: N3
User constants for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
High-slip
braking
deceleration
frequency
width
Sets the frequency width for deceleration during high-slip braking as a percent, taking the Maximum Frequency
(E1-04) as 100%.
1 to 20
5%
No
A
A
588H
-
N3-02
High-slip
braking current limit
Sets the current limit for deceleration
during high-slip braking as a percent,
taking the motor rated current as
100%. The setting value must be
150% of the Inverter rated current or
less.
100 to
200
150%
No
A
A
589H
-
N3-03
High-slip
braking stop
dwell time
Set in seconds the dwell time for the
output frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz)
during V/f control.
Effective only during deceleration for
high-slip braking.
0.1 to
10.0
1.0 s
No
A
A
58AH
-
Constant
Number
N3-01
5-58
Control
Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Change
during
Operation
Name
MEMOPage
BUS
Register
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
N3-04
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the OL time when the output frequency does not change for some reason during deceleration for high-slip
braking.
30 to
1200
40 s
No
Name
High-slip
braking OL
time
Control
Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
A
A
MEMOPage
BUS
Register
58BH
-
Digital Operator Constants: o
The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections and
the copy function.
Monitor Select: o1
User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
o1-01
Monitor
selection
Set the number of the monitor
item to be displayed in the earliest 4 monitor items. (U1-)
The output monitor voltage (factory setting) can be changed.
4 to 33
6
Yes
A
A
A
500H
-
o1-02
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned
on.
Monitor
1: Frequency reference
selection after
2: Output frequency
power up
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o101
1 to 4
1
Yes
A
A
A
501H
6-117
Constant
Number
Name
F7 Instruction Manual
5-59
Constant
Number
o1-03
Name
Description
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
r/min units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Frequency
units of refer- Set the desired values for
setting and display for the max.
ence setting
output frequency.
and monitor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
39999
0
No
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
A
A
A
502H
6-117
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
5-60
F7 Instruction Manual
Multi-function Selections: o2
User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
LOCAL/
REMOTE
key enable/
disable
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between
the Digital Operator and the
constant settings.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
505H
6-117
STOP key
during control circuit
terminal
operation
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from and
external terminal, the Stop
Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Always effective
even during run.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
506H
6-117
o2-03
User constant initial
value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the
set constants as user initial
values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded
user initial values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
507H
6-117
o2-04
Do not set unless using a control
kVA selection board from an Inverter with a
different capacity.
0 to FF
0*
No
A
A
A
508H
-
o2-05
When the frequency reference is
set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets
Frequency
whether the Enter Key is necesreference set- sary.
ting method
0: Enter Key needed
selection
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
509H
6-118
o2-06
Operation
selection
when digital
operator is
disconnected
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation
continues even if the Digital
Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at
Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter
output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
50AH
-
o2-07
Cumulative
operation
time setting
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated
from the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
50BH
6-118
Constant
Number
o2-01
o2-02
Name
F7 Instruction Manual
5-61
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Name
Description
Setting
Range
o2-08
Cumulative
operation
time selection
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All
time while the Inverter
power is on is accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run
time. (Only Inverter output
time is accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
50CH
-
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates
from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
50EH
6-118
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
5-62
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
o3-01
Copy function selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
No
A
A
A
515H
6-119
o3-02
Read permitted selection
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
516H
6-119
Constant
Number
Name
F7 Instruction Manual
T: Motor Auto tuning
The following settings are made with the motor auto tuning constants (T constants): Settings for auto tuning.
Constant
Number
*
*
*
*
*
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
T1-00
Motor 1/2
selection
Set the location where the auto
tuned motor constants are to be
stored.
1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
1 or 2
1
No
No
No
A
700H
4-12
T1-01
Auto tuning
mode selection
Set the auto tuning mode.
0: Rotational auto tuning
1: Stationary auto tuning
2: Stationary auto tuning for
line-to-line resistance only
0 to 2 *1
0
No
A
A
A
701H
4-10
4-12
T1-02
Motor output
power
Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40 kW
No
A
A
A
702H
4-12
T1-03
Motor rated
voltage
Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.
0 to
255.0*2
200.0 V
No
No
No
A
703H
4-12
T1-04
Motor rated
current
Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.
6.40 *4
No
A
A
A
704H
4-12
T1-05
Motor base
frequency
Set the base frequency of the
motor in hertz.
400.0*5
60.0 Hz
No
No
No
A
705H
4-12
T1-06
Number of
motor poles
Set the number of motor poles.
2 to 48
poles
4 poles
No
No
No
A
706H
4-12
T1-07
Motor base
speed
Set the base speed of the motor
in r/min.
0 to
24000
1750
r/min
No
No
No
A
707H
4-12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
0.32 to
0 to
*2
1.90 A
*3
Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value T1-01=2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-63
U: Monitor Constants
The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in drive
mode.
Status Monitor Constants: U1
The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Loop
V/f with VecRegister
PG
tor
U1-01
Frequency
reference
Monitors/sets the frequency
reference value.*
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
40H
U1-02
Output frequency
Monitors the output frequency.*
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
41H
U1-03
Output current
Monitors the output current.
10 V: Inverter rated output
current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value
output)
0.1 A
A
A
A
42H
U1-04
Control
method
Checks the current control
method.
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
43H
U1-05
Motor speed
Monitors the detected motor
speed.*
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
44H
U1-06
Output voltage
Monitors the output voltage
reference value in the Inverter.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
0.1 V
A
A
A
45H
U1-07
DC bus voltage
Monitors the main DC voltage
in the Inverter.
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
1V
A
A
A
46H
U1-08
Monitors the output power
Output power
(internally detected value).
10 V: Inverter capacity
(max. applicable motor capacity)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1
kW
A
A
A
47H
U1-09
Torque reference
0.1%
No
No
A
48H
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Monitor the internal torque ref- 10 V: Motor rated torque
erence value for vector control. (0 to ± 10 V possible)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency reference setting/display unit).
5-64
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Loop
V/f with VecRegister
PG
tor
Shows input ON/OFF status.
U1-10=
U1-10
Input terminal status
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
(Cannot be output.)
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
-
A
A
A
49H
-
A
A
A
4AH
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
4BH
1
hr
A
A
A
4CH
-
A
A
A
4DH
Shows output ON/OFF status.
U1-11=
U1-11
Output terminal status
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 2
(Cannot be output.)
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 3
(P2) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.
Inverter operating status.
U1-12=
U1-12
Operation
status
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
U1-13
Cumulative
operation
time
Monitors the total operating
time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operat(Cannot be output.)
ing time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o208.
U1-14
Software No.
(flash memory)
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
F7 Instruction Manual
(Cannot be output.)
5-65
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Loop
V/f with VecRegister
PG
tor
Name
U1-15
Terminal A1
input voltage
Monitors the input voltage of
the voltage frequency reference. An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1%
A
A
A
4EH
U1-16
Terminal A2
input voltage
Monitors the input voltage of
the multi-function analog input. 10 V: 100% (10 V)
An input of 10 V corresponds
(0 to ±10 V possible)
to 100%.
0.1%
A
A
A
4FH
U1-18
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Monitors the calculated value
10 V: Motor rated secondary
of the motor secondary current.
current)
The motor rated secondary cur(0 to ±10 V output)
rent corresponds to 100%.
0.1%
A
A
A
51H
U1-19
Motor exciting current
(Id)
0.1%
No
No
A
52H
Output frequency after
soft-start
Monitors the output frequency
after a soft start.
The frequency given does not
10 V: Max. frequency
include compensations, such as (0 to ± 10 V possible)
slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
53H
ASR input
Monitors the input to the speed
control loop.
10 V: Max. frequency
The maximum frequency corre- (0 to ± 10 V possible)
sponds to 100%.
0.01
%
No
A
No
54H
U1-22
ASR output
10 V: Motor rated secondary
Monitors the output from the
current)
speed control loop.
The motor rated secondary cur- (0 to ± 10 V possible)
rent corresponds to 100%.
0.01
%
No
A
No
55H
U1-24
PID feedback value
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
57H
U1-26
Output voltage reference
(Vq)
Monitors the Inverter internal
voltage reference for motor
secondary current control.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1 V
No
No
A
59H
U1-27
Output voltage reference
(Vd)
Monitors the Inverter internal
voltage reference for motor
excitation current control.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1 V
No
No
A
5AH
U1-28
Software No.
(CPU)
(Manufacturer’s CPU software
No.)
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
5BH
U1-32
ACR output
of q axis
Monitors the current control
output value for the motor secondary current.
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1
%
No
No
A
5FH
U1-33
ACR output
of d axis
Monitors the current control
10 V: 100%
output value for the motor exci(0 to ± 10 V possible)
tation current.
0.1
%
No
No
A
60H
U1-20
U1-21
5-66
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Constant
Number
Description
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor excitation current. 10 V: Motor rated secondary
The motor rated secondary curcurrent)
rent corresponds to 100%.
(0 to ±10 V output)
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
U1-34
OPE fault
constant
Shows the first constant number where an OPE fault was
detected.
(Cannot be output.)
U1-36
PID input
volume
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID control output
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
U1-38
PID command
PID command + PID command
bias
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Loop
V/f with VecRegister
PG
tor
-
A
A
A
61H
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
63H
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
64H
0.01
%
A
A
A
65H
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
66H
(Cannot be output.)
1
hr
A
A
A
68H
10 V: Max. frequency
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
U1-40=
U1-39
MEMOBUS
communications error
code
U1-40
Cooling fan
operating
time
F7 Instruction Manual
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used (always 0).
1: Parity
error
1: Overrun
error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
Not used (always 0).
Monitors the total operating
time of the cooling fan. The
time can be set in 02-10.
5-67
Fault Trace: U2
User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Loop
V/f with VecRegister
PG
tor
Constant
Number
Name
U2-01
Current fault
The contents of the current fault.
-
A
A
A
80H
U2-02
The contents of the error that
Previous fault occurred just prior to the current
fault.
-
A
A
A
81H
U2-03
Reference
frequency at
fault
The reference frequency when the
previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
82H
U2-04
Output frequency at
fault
The output frequency when the previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
83H
U2-05
Output current at fault
The output current when the previous fault occurred.
0.1 A
A
A
A
84H
U2-06
Motor speed
at fault
The motor speed when the previous
fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
85H
U2-07
Output voltage reference
at fault
The output reference voltage when
the previous fault occurred.
0.1 V
A
A
A
86H
U2-08
DC bus voltage at fault
The main current DC voltage when
the previous fault occurred.
1V
A
A
A
87H
U2-09
Output power The output power when the previat fault
ous fault occurred.
0.1
kW
A
A
A
88H
U2-10
Torque reference at fault
The torque reference when the previous fault occurred. The motor
rated torque corresponds to 100%.
0.1%
No
No
A
89H
U2-11
Input terminal status at
fault
The input terminal status when the
previous fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U110.
-
A
A
A
8AH
U2-12
Output termi- The output terminal status when the
nal status at
previous fault occurred. The format
fault
is the same as for U1-11.
-
A
A
A
8BH
U2-13
Operation
status at fault
The operating status when the previous fault occurred. The format is
the same as for U1-12.
-
A
A
A
8CH
U2-14
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
The operating time when the previous fault occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
8DH
Description
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-68
F7 Instruction Manual
Fault History: U3
User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
U3-01
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Most recent The error contents of 1st
fault
previous fault.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Loop
V/f with VecRegister
PG
tor
-
A
A
A
90H
Second
U3-02 most recent
fault
The error contents of 2nd
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
91H
U3-03
Third most
recent fault
The error contents of 3rd
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
92H
U3-04
Fourth most The error contents of 4th
recent fault previous fault.
-
A
A
A
93H
1
hr
A
A
A
94H
AccumuThe total operating time
U3-06 lated time of when the 2nd previous fault
second fault occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
95H
AccumuThe total operating time
U3-07 lated time of when the 3rd previous fault
third fault
occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
96H
AccumuThe total operating time
U3-08 lated time of when the 4th previous fault
fourth fault occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
97H
Cumulative The total operating time
U3-05 operation
when the 1st previous fault
time at fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-69
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Factory Setting
Constant
Number
Name
V/f Con- V/F with
trol
PG
A1-02=0 A1-02=1
Open
Loop
Vector
A1-02=2
Setting Range
Unit
0 to 3
1
2
3
2
b3-01
Speed search selection
b3-02
Speed search operating current
0 to 200
1%
120
-
100
C3-01
Slip compensation gain
0.0 to 2.5
0.1
0.0
-
1.0
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time constant
0 to 10000
1 ms
2000
-
200
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time constant
0 to 10000
1 ms
200
200
20
E1-04
E3-02
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
60.0
60.0
*2
*2
E1-05
E3-03
Max. voltage (VMAX)
0.0 to 255.0
0.1 V
200.0
200.0
*2
*2
E1-06
E3-04
Base frequency (FA)
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
60.0
60.0
*2
*2
E1-07
E3-05
Mid. output frequency (FB)
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
3.0
3.0
*2
*2
E1-08
E3-06
Mid. output frequency voltage (VC)*1
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
15.0
15.0
*2
*2
E1-09
E3-07
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
1.5
1.5
*2
*2
E1-10
E3-08
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)*1
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
9.0
9.0
*2
*2
60.0
200.0
60.0
3.0
11.0
0.5
2.0
* 1. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
5-70
F7 Instruction Manual
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
19.0
24.0
19.0
24.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
E1-10
*
V
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
11.0
13.0
11.0
15.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
2.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
11.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
E1-10
*
V
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
2.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-71
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
11.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
E1-10
*
V
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
11.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
2.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5-72
F7 Instruction Manual
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Factory Setting
0.4
0
0.75
1
1.5
2
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
5
7.5
6
11
7
15
8
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
kHz
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection*1 *2
0.50 (Open loop vector control)
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
1.90
3.30
6.20
8.50
14.00
19.60
26.60
39.7
53.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.50
2.60
2.90
2.73
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
1.20
1.80
2.80
3.00
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
13.8
18.5
18.4
19.6
18.2
15.5
19.5
17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
14
26
53
77
112
172
262
245
272
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. base block (BB) time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
L2-08
Frequency reduction gain at
KEB start
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
F7 Instruction Manual
5-73
5-74
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
23.10
23.10
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
kHz
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
Factory Setting
18.5
9
22
A
30
B
37
C
45
D
0.50 (Open loop vector control)
55
E
75
F
90
10
110
11
2.00 (Open loop vector control)
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
260.0
260.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.43
1.39
1.39
1.39
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
44.0
45.6
72.0
72.0
72.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
19.5
20.8
18.8
20.2
20.5
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
W
505
538
699
823
852
960
1200
1200
1200
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru
time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. base block (BB) time
s
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L2-08
Frequency reduction gain at KEB
start
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
F7 Instruction Manual
400 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Energy-saving filter time
constant
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection
Factory Setting
0.4
20
0.75
21
1.5
22
2.2
23
3.7
24
4.0
25
5.5
26
7.5
27
11
28
15
29
s
0.50 (Open loop vector control)
-
576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
kHz
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Motor rated current
A
1.00
1.60
3.10
4.20
7.00
7.00
9.80
13.30
19.9
26.5
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.60
2.50
3.00
2.70
2.70
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
Motor no-load current
A
0.60
0.80
1.40
1.50
2.30
2.30
2.60
4.00
5.6
7.6
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
14.3
18.3
18.7
19.3
19.3
18.2
15.5
19.6
17.2
W
14
26
53
77
130
130
193
263
385
440
s
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.0
2.0
s
s
°C
0.1
0.3
95
0.2
0.3
95
0.3
0.3
95
0.4
0.3
95
0.5
0.3
95
0.6
0.3
95
0.6
0.3
95
0.7
0.3
95
0.8
0.3
95
0.9
0.3
95
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Min. base block (BB) time
Voltage recovery time
Overheat pre-alarm level
F7 Instruction Manual
38.198 22.459 10.100
5-75
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Energy-saving filter time
constant
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection
Factory Setting
18.5
2A
s
-
22
2B
30
2C
37
2D
45
2E
55
2F
0.50 (Open loop vector control)
115.74 103.58
75
30
90
31
110
32
132
33
2.00 (Open loop vector control)
92.54
76.32
71.56
67.20
46.20
41.22
36.23
33.18
kHz
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Motor rated current
A
32.9
38.6
52.3
65.6
79.7
95.0
130.0
156.0
190.0
223.0
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.46
1.39
1.40
1.40
1.38
Motor no-load current
A
7.8
9.2
10.9
19.1
22.0
24.0
36.0
40.0
49.0
58.0
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
23.5
20.7
18.8
19.9
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
W
508
586
750
925
1125
1260
1600
1760
2150
2350
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
s
s
°C
1.0
0.6
95
1.0
0.6
95
1.1
0.6
95
1.1
0.6
95
1.2
0.6
95
1.2
1.0
100
1.3
1.0
95
1.5
1.0
110
1.7
1.0
110
1.7
1.0
110
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB) time
Voltage recovery time
Overheat pre-alarm level
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters
with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 7.5 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5:
12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will
need to be reduced.
5-76
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Factory Setting
160
34
185
35
200
3E
220
36
300
37
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
30.13
30.57
27.13
27.13
21.76
kHz
4
4
1
1
1
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
*
2.00 (Open loop vector control)
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
270.0
310.0
370.0
370.0
500.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.35
1.30
1.30
1.30
1.25
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
70.0
81.0
96.0
96.0
130.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.029
0.025
0.020
0.020
0.014
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
2850
3200
3700
3700
4700
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. base block (BB) time
s
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.0
2.1
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
100
95
95
95
95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters
with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 7.5 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5:
12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will
need to be reduced.
F7 Instruction Manual
5-77
Notes:
5-78
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant Settings by
Function
Application and Overload Selections .......................... 6-2
Frequency Reference.................................................. 6-6
Run Command .......................................................... 6-12
Stopping Methods ..................................................... 6-15
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ......... 6-20
Adjusting Frequency References .............................. 6-29
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function).. 6-35
Improved Operating Efficiency .................................. 6-37
Machine Protection ................................................... 6-43
Continuing Operation ................................................ 6-56
Inverter Protection..................................................... 6-64
Input Terminal Functions ........................................... 6-66
Monitor Constants ..................................................... 6-77
Individual Functions .................................................. 6-82
Digital Operator Functions .......................................6-117
Options.................................................................... 6-125
F7 Instruction Manual
6-1
Application and Overload Selections
Select the Overload to Suit the Application
Set C6-01 (CT: Low carrier constant torque, VT: High carrier variable torque) depending on the application for
which the Inverter is used. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, overload tolerance, and maximum
output frequency depend on the setting in C6-01. If using the Inverter with C6-01 set to the factory setting (1: CT),
use a load application in which load torque reduces with the speed, e.g., fans and pumps.
Related Constants
No.
Constant
No.
Name
C6-01
CT/VT selection
C6-02
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Carrier frequency selection Select F to enable detailed settings using constants
C6-03 to C6-07.
C6-03
Carrier frequency upper
limit
Details
0: CT (low carrier, constant torque, 150% per
minute)
1: VT (high carrier, variable torque, 120% per
minute)
Set upper and lower carrier frequency limits in
kHz.
Set the carrier wave gain as shown below.
In vector control method, the carrier frequency is
fixed according to C6-03 (Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit).
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
vector
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Changes
During
Operation?
0 or 1
1
No
Q
Q
Q
0 to F
6*1
No
Q
Q
Q
15.0 kHz
*1
No
A
A
A
15.0 kHz
No
A
A
No
No
A
A
No
2.0 to
15.0
*2 *3
Carrier frequency
C6-04
Carrier frequency lower
limit
Output frequency x
(C6-05) x K
Output frequency
0.4 to
15.0
*2 *3
*1
(Maximum output frequency)
C6-05
Carrier frequency
proportional gain
K is the coefficient determined by the set
value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz
:K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 2
00 to 99
*3
00
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 2. The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. Can be set and referenced only when C6-01 is set to 1, and C6-02 is set to F.
6-2
F7 Instruction Manual
Difference Between CT and VT
The characteristics of CT (low carrier, constant torque) and VT (high carrier, variable torque) are shown below.
CT: Low Carrier, Constant Torque
VT: High Carrier, Variable Torque
Variable Torque
Constant Torque
Torque
Torque
0
Motor speed
Motor speed
Constant torque means a constant load torque for all
motor speed, and it requires overload resistance capability. Applications include pushers, conveyors, cranes, and
other friction or heavy loads.
Variable torque means that the load torque will decrease
as the speed decreases. Normally, overload resistance
capability is not required. Applications include fans and
pumps.
Low carrier: Electromagnetic noise is present.
High carrier: Electromagnetic noise is not present.
Setting Precautions
C6-01 (CT/VT Selection)
When setting C6-01, observe the following precautions.
• Depending on the set value in C6-01, the setting range of the related constants is limited as follows:
C6-01 Set Value
Inverter Overload Protection Level
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
0 (Low Carrier, Constant
Torque)
1 (High Carrier, Variable
Torque)
150% Inverter rated current/1
min.
120% Inverter rated current/1
min.
0: Low carrier, low noise
1: Carrier 2 kHz
0: Low carrier low noise
1: Carrier 2 kHz
2: Carrier 5 kHz
3: Carrier 7.5 kHz
4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15 kHz
F: User-set*
E1-04 and E3-02 (Max. Output Frequency)
150 Hz
400 Hz
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level During
Acceleration)
150%
120%
L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level During
Operation)
150%
120%
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters for 0.4 to 22 kW: 6 (15 kHz)
200 V Class Inverters for 30 to 90 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 30 to 185 kW: 4 (10 kHz)
200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 220 to 300 kW: 1 (2 kHz)
• When the setting in E1-04 or E3-02 is greater than 150 Hz, if C6-01 is set to 0, an OPE02 (Invalid constant set-
ting range) error will occur.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-3
Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions items.
• When using a device with C6-01 set to 1 (VT), adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.
Wiring Length
50 m or less
100 m or less
Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency)
setting
0 to 6 (15 kHz)
0 to 4 (10 kHz)
0 to 2 (5 kHz)
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency to match the output fre-
quency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier
Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
C a r r ie r F r e q u e n c y
C 6 -0 3
C 6 -0 4
O u t p u t f r e×qCu 6e -n0 c5y
× K *
O u tp u t fre q u e n c y
E 1 -0 4
M a x . O u tp u t F re q u e n c y
Fig 6.1
*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz < C6-03: K=1
• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed by the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-set, or
by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
If C6-01 = 0 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 2 to E.
If C6-01 = 1 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 7 to E.
6-4
F7 Instruction Manual
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level
When using a 200 V Class Inverter 30 to 90 kW or a 400 V Class Inverter for 30 to 185 kW with a carrier frequency of 10 kHz or higher and C6-01 is set to 1, the Inverter overload level will be reduced. When the overload
current falls to below 120%, OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction
level is shown below.
Overload current reduction level
100%
80%
0
5 kHz
10 kHz
15 kHz
Fig 6.2 Overload Current Reduction Level
F7 Instruction Manual
6-5
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
b1-01
Reference selection
H6-01
Pulse train
input function selection
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
Description
Set the frequency reference source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Set the number of pulses taking the reference to be
100%, in Hz.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
1000 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Fig 6.3 Frequency Setting Display
6-6
F7 Instruction Manual
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input), or
control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal A1.
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency
reference)
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.4 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input
2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary
If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed frequency
reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 (master speed frequency reference) will be
the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 (auxiliary speed frequency reference)
will be the Inverter frequency reference.
Inverter
Master/
Auxiliary
S3 Multi-step speed
command 1
SC Sequence common
0 to 10 V input
0 to 10 V
input
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency
reference)
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.5 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input
Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, observe the following precautions.
• Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch S1 for switching between voltage and current (factory setting is ON).
• Set H3-08 (Multi-function input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-7
Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A2. Input the current (4
to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection) is set to 0 (factory setting) the
input on A2 is added to A1.
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
1 to 20 mA input
A1 (Auxiliary speed frequency
reference)
A2 (Master speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.6 Frequency Reference Using Current
Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
• If using terminal A2 as the master speed reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1, terminal A2
analog input as the master frequency reference, and terminal A1 analog input as auxiliary frequency reference.
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference pulse
frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Inverter
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
Heavy duty
30 to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input
RP(Pulse train input terminal)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.7 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
6-8
F7 Instruction Manual
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-F7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps using 16 frequency references and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi-function contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Terminal
Constant Number
Set Value
S4
H1-02
3
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
S5
H1-03
4
Multi-step speed command 2
S6
H1-04
5
Multi-step speed command 3
S7
H1-05
6
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)
Details
Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed commands 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table
shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS4
TerminalS5
TerminalS6
TerminalS7
Speed
Multi-step
Speed Command 1
Multi-step
Speed Command 2
Multi-step
Speed Command 3
Jog Frequency Selection
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 3 d1-03
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
9
-
-
-
ON*
Jog frequency d1-17
Selected Frequency
* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-9
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference
1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When setting
d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step operation.
Inverter
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 Error reset
S4 Multi-step command 1
S5 Multi-step command 2
S6 Multi-step command 3
S7 Jog frequency
SC Sequence common
Fig 6.8 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
6-10
F7 Instruction Manual
Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference
Frequency reference 2: Auxiliary
speed frequency
Frequency reference 1: Master
speed
frequency
Frequency
reference 3
Jog frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed
command 1
Multi-step speed
command 2
Multi-step speed
command 3
Jog
frequency
selection
Fig 6.9 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
F7 Instruction Manual
6-11
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-02
Name
Operation method selection
Description
Set the run command source.
0: Digital operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
1
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Q
Q
Q
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, JOG,
and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation
will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop.
6-12
F7 Instruction Manual
Forward/stop
Inverter
Reverse/stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.10 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
F7 Instruction Manual
6-13
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, terminals S1
and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input
terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop
switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command
(operates when ON)
Stop command
(stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Fig 6.11 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
Run command
OFF
(stopped)
Stop command
Forward/reverse
command
OFF (forward)
ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Forward
Fig 6.12 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run
command self-holding in the Inverter.
IN F O
6-14
F7 Instruction Manual
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
0
No
Q
Q
Q
b1-03
Stopping method selection
Select stopping method when stop command is
sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to
stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are
ignored during deceleration time.)
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC
injection braking starting
frequency)
Set the frequency to start the DC injection braking
in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is
selected.
DC injection braking starts from E1-09 when b201 < E1-09.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
b2-02
DC injection braking current
Set the DC injection braking current as a percent,
with the Inverter rated current as 100%.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
DC injection braking time
at stop
Set the DC injection braking time at stop in seconds.
Use when stopping if rotations continue due to
momentum.
Set to 0.00 to disable DC injection braking time at
stop.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
b2-04
F7 Instruction Manual
6-15
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to
a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied using
the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-21 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time
when stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.13 Deceleration to Stop
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the machine
and inertia including the load.
R u n c o m m a n d
O N
O F F
O u tp u t fre q u e n c y
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.
Fig 6.14 Coast to Stop
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Base block Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
IN F O
6-16
F7 Instruction Manual
DC Braking Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made for the
time set in L2-03 (Minimum Base block (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b2-02 is sent to
the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is determined by the set
value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.
DC injection brake time
Run command
ON
OFF
b2-04
10
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
b2-04
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
DC injection brake time
10
Output frequency at
stop command input
100% (maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.15 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Base block Time (L2-03) when an over current (OC) occurs during stopping.
IN F O
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output is
interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the time
T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and the deceleration
time.
Run command
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output
frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
Output frequency at
stop command input
Minimum output frequency
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.16 Coast to Stop with Timer
F7 Instruction Manual
6-17
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply the DC injection brake voltage to the motor while it is either coasting to a stop or to
stop the motor and before restarting it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
b2-02
DC injection braking current
Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
b2-03
DC injection braking time
at start
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When
the set value is 0, DC injection braking at start is
not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1-) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can apply
the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has
been set when the Inverter is being stopped.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
E1-09
b2-01
DC injection brake
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command
and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will
resume.
Fig 6.17 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6-18
F7 Instruction Manual
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current),
you can change the DC injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake voltage level
Inverter rated current
If you set this constant to 7 and use over torque detection in
the multi-function output, you can apply the DC injection
brake only when over torque detection 1 turns ON.
Fig 6.18 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal
(H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To
cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Constant
Number
C1-09
Name
Emergency stop time
Description
The deceleration time when the multi-function
input “Emergency (fast) stop” is ON.
This function can be used a stopping method
when a fault has been detected.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
6000.0*
10.0 s
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings range is
0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
F7 Instruction Manual
6-19
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time
Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration time
indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration time is
C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
Set the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
the maximum output frequency, in 1-second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output
frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
Acceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is
ON.
Yes
A
A
A
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
Deceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is
ON.
Yes
A
A
A
C1-05
Acceleration time 3
Acceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2" is
ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-06
Deceleration time 3
Deceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2" is
ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-07
Acceleration time 4
Acceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" and
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2" are
ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-08
Deceleration time 4
Deceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" and
"Acceleration/deceleration time 2" are ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-10
Acceleration/deceleration
time setting unit
C1-11
6-20
Name
Setting
Range
Acceleration/deceleration
time switching frequency
0: 0.01 s
1: 0.1 s
Set the frequency at which acceleration/deceleration time switches automatically.
Less than set frequency: Acceleration/deceleration
time 4
Set frequency or above: Acceleration/deceleration
time 1
Multi-function inputs "Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 1" and "Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 2" are given priority.
0.0 to
6000.0*
10.0 s
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration start
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration end
Description
Set the S-curve characteristic time for each part in
seconds.
When you set the S-curve characteristic time, Scurve characteristic time at start and end during
acceleration/deceleration is lengthened by 1/2
only.
Run
command
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration start
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration end
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
OFF
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
C2-03
C2-01
C2-04
Time
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings range is
0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Constant C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value
Details
0
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
1
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function input
terminals (H1-) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time
selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/OFF
status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/DeceleraAcceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 1 Ter- tion Time Selection 2 Terminal
minal
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
OFF
OFF
C1-01
C1-02
ON
OFF
C1-03
C1-04
OFF
ON
C1-05
C1-06
ON
ON
C1-07
C1-08
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration time
automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-21
Output frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
time
switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate
C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.19 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
6-22
F7 Instruction Manual
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration
time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.20 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start time,
deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
IN F O
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
C2-02
Output frequency
C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
C2-04
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
Fig 6.21 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
F7 Instruction Manual
6-23
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing the
output frequency, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select a deceleration stop. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
b6-01
Name
Description
Dwell frequency at start
b6-02
Dwell time at start
b6-03
frequency at stop
ON
Run
command
Output
frequency
b6-04
Dwell time at stop
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
OFF
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
b6-04
Time
The Dwell function temporarily stores the
frequency when starting and stopping heavy loads.
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed on the
motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-02, the
acceleration rate will begin to decrease. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current increases to the value set in L3-02. With this setting,
the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
6-24
Name
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
0 to 200
120%*
No
A
A
A
L3-01
Stall prevention selection
during acceleration
0: Disabled (Accelerates according to the setting.
Motor may stall if the load is too great.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stops when the level set
in L3-02 is exceeded. Acceleration restarts
using current value recovery.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Adjusts acceleration
using the level set in L3-02 as the standard.
The acceleration time setting is ignored.)
L3-02
Stall prevention level during acceleration
Set as a percent taking the Inverter rated voltage to
be 100%.
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.
Lower the set value if the motor stalls using the
factory setting.
F7 Instruction Manual
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during acceleration
If using the motor at a frequency higher than the
setting in E1-06, set the lower limit of the stall prevention level during acceleration as a percent, taking the Inverter rated current to be 100%.
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 to 100
50%
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
* Shows the initial value when C6-01 is set to 1. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value is 150%.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-25
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled
to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 6.22 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the factory
settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling. L3-03
is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being reduced more than
necessary.
• Set the constants as a percent taking the inverter rated voltage to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration)
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Output frequency
Fig 6.23 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-26
F7 Instruction Manual
Preventing Over voltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes deceleration smoother to suppress increases in DC bus
voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the deceleration
time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during deceleration, deceleration stops. When deceleration falls below the level, it’s restarted. Using this operation, deceleration
time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value, and if L3-04 is set
to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of the stall prevention
level during deceleration.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L3-04
Name
Stall prevention selection
during deceleration function selection
F7 Instruction Manual
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Motor decelerates according to
setting. When the deceleration time is short,
there is a risk of main circuit overvoltage
(OV) occurring.)
1: Enabled (Prevents deceleration when main
circuit voltage reaches the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts after voltage has been
restored.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Minimizes deceleration
judging from main circuit voltage. The
deceleration time setting is ignored.)
3: Enabled (with dynamic braking)
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be
sure to set constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
0 to 3
1
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
6-27
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Deceleration time controlled to
prevent over voltage
Output frequency
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.24 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Inverter capacity. Refer to the following
table for details.
Inverter Capacity
200 V class
400 V class
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V
760
E1-01 < 400 V
660
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set con-
stant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option
enabled, set L3-04 to 3.
6-28
F7 Instruction Manual
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
H3-02
Frequency reference (voltage) terminal A1 input
gain
H3-03
Frequency reference (volt- Set the frequency during 0 V input as a percent,
age) terminal A1 input bias taking max. output frequency to be 100%.
Description
Set the frequency during 10 V input as a percent,
taking max. output frequency to be 100%.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
H3-08
Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 signal
level selection
0: Limit negative frequency settings for gain and
bias settings to 0.
1: Do not limit negative frequency settings for
gain and bias settings to 0 (i.e., allow reverse
operation).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input using the switch
on the control panel.
H3-09
Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 function
selection
Select multi-function analog input function for terminal A2.
0 to 1F
0
No
A
A
A
H3-10
Frequency reference (current) terminal A2 input
gain
Set the reference capacity for each function during
10 V (20 mA) input as a percent.
Set the 100% content function selected using H309 to 100%.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H3-11
Frequency reference (current) terminal A2 input
bias
Set the reference capacity for each function during
0 V (4 mA) input as a percent.
Set the 100% content function selected using H309 to 100%.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and H303. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjustments using
H3-10 and H3-11.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-29
Frequency reference
Frequency reference
Terminal A2 input
voltage (current)
Terminal A1
input voltage
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A1 input
Fig 6.25 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using an analog input.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.26 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set to
100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference
100%
H3-02
50%
H3-02
0.5
Terminal A1 input voltage
0
10 V
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage is
added to A1 as a bias.
6-30
F7 Instruction Manual
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.27 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
Frequency reference
H3-02
10%
Bias
Terminal A1 input voltage
0V
10 V
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function avoids resonance caused by characteristic frequencies in the machinery due to the
motor.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation still
used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-31
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
d3-04
Jump frequency width
Set the frequency center value at which to prohibit
settings, in hertz.
Set to 0.0 to disable the jump frequency.
Make sure the settings are as follows: d3-01 ≥ d302 ≥ d3-03.
Operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Changes during acceleration and deceleration are made gradually without performing
jumps.
0.0 to
400.0
Set the jump frequency width in hertz.
The jump frequency range is as follows: (Jump
frequency ±d3-04).
0.0 to
20.0
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
1.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
width d3-04
Jump
frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency reference
Jump
frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump
frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump
frequency
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.28 Jump Frequency
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency),
you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A2 input level.
6-32
F7 Instruction Manual
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0V
(4 mA)
Multi-function analog input
10 V terminal A2 input level
(20 mA)
Fig 6.29 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-33
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set the
pulse frequency in constant H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6-03
and H6-04.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
H6-01
Pulse train input function
selection
H6-02
Pulse train input scaling
Set the number of pulses in Hz, taking the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
H6-03
Pulse train input gain
Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse
train set in H6-02 is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H6-04
Pulse train input bias
Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0.
-100.0 to
100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H6-05
Pulse train input filter time
Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time
constant in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.
Gain and bias
Filter
RP
Cycle
measurement
Pulse
=0
H6-03
=1
1
1+sT
H6-04
H6-05
0
100
Master speed
frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
=2
H6-01
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.30 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
6-34
F7 Instruction Manual
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency)
to be 100%.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
d2-01
Frequency reference upper
limit
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency upper limit as a percent,
taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-step
speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
d2-02
Frequency reference lower
limit
Set the output frequency lower limit as a percent,
taking the base reference to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
d2-03
Master speed reference
lower limit
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a
percent, taking the max. output frequency to be
100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
6-35
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 9 (output frequency
lower level), you can adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0V
(4 mA)
Multi-function analog input
10 V terminal A2 input level
(20 mA)
Fig 6.31 Analog Output Characteristics of Output Frequency Lower Level
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower limit have been set at the same time, the larger set
value will become the frequency lower limit.
IN F O
6-36
F7 Instruction Manual
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating
at the rated load, constant E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the frequency in constant C3-01 is added to the output frequency.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Slip compensation gain
Use this constant to improve speed accuracy when
operating under a load. Normally, there is no need
to make this setting.
Adjust constant C3-01 under the following conditions:
• Increase the set value when the speed falls to
below the target value.
• Decrease the set value when the speed rises to
above the target value.
0.0 to 2.5
0.0
Yes
A
No
A
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time
Set the primary delay time constant for the slip
compensation function in seconds.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust constant C3-02 under the following conditions:
• When the slip compensation response is low,
lower the set value.
• When the speed is unstable, increase the set
value.
0 to
10000
2000 ms
No
A
No
A
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Set the upper limit of the compensation amount
for the slip compensation function as a percent,
taking the motor rated slip amount to be 100%.
0 to
250
200%
No
A
No
A
C3-04
Slip compensation during
regeneration
0: Slip compensation is disabled during
regeneration.
1: Slip compensation is enabled during
regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during
regeneration, you might have to use the braking
option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, or
Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
0 or 1
0
No
A
No
A
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
Constant
Number
C3-01
Name
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
F7 Instruction Manual
6-37
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain
You can switch the C3-01 constant settings as shown below by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
• Open loop vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following formula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (r/min.) × No. of motor
poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The motor
rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using auto tuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this constant to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation gain by
0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if the speed is
greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 2000 ms
• Open loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value.
When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit
Set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the motor rated slip amount as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation gain, the
motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Make sure that
the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
6-38
F7 Instruction Manual
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.32 Slip Compensation Limit
F7 Instruction Manual
6-39
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use the braking option (braking
resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation
If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will not
change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, change the settings to
enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and torque
control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current will increase
by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit operation is disabled, so check the Inverter current margin.
Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than the
motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to change
the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared to the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may be lost
even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss × constant C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference × C4-01
6-40
F7 Instruction Manual
Related Constants
Constant
Number
C4-01
C4-02
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Torque compensation gain
Set the torque compensation gain using the multiplication factor. Normally, there is no need to set
this constant. Adjust the torque compensation gain
in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the
set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the
Inverter rated output current range.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
Torque compensation primary delay time constant
Set the primary delay for the torque compensation
function in ms.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust this constant in the following circumstances.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set
value.
0 to
10000
200 ms
No
A
A
A
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain
Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using open
loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain using V/f control in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output
current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings:
• V/f control without PG: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• open loop vector control: 20 ms
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the constant as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-41
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This function
can be used in V/f without PG and V/f with PG.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
N1-01
N1-02
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Hunting-prevention function selection
0: Hunting-prevention function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
This function is enabled in V/f control method
only.
If high response is to be given priority over vibration suppression, disable the hunting-prevention
function.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
No
Hunting-prevention gain
Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light load, increase the
setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the setting.
If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too
suppressed and the motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
A
A
No
Name
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly
applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value, and compensating the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
6-42
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No
No
No
A
N2-01
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR) gain
Set the internal speed feedback detection control
gain using the multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
• If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time, while checking the response.
N2-02
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR) time constant
Set the time constant to decide the rate of change
in the speed feedback detection control.
0 to 2000
50 ms
No
No
No
A
N2-03
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR) time constant 2
Set the time constant to decide the amount of
change in the speed.
0 to 2000
750 ms
No
No
No
A
F7 Instruction Manual
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
The motor torque limit function is enabled only with open-loop torque control.
In the open loop vector control method, the user-set value is applied to the torque limit by calculating internally the
torque output by the motor. Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a specified amount to be applied
to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount to occur.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
L7-01
Forward drive torque limit
L7-02
Reverse drive torque limit
Set the torque limit value as a percent of the motor
rated torque.
You can set up to four separate limits.
L7-03
Forward regenerative
torque limit
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
L7-04
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 300
200%
No
No
No
A
0 to 300
200%
No
No
No
A
0 to 300
200%
No
No
No
A
0 to 300
200%
No
No
No
A
No. of motor
rotations
Regenerative status
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Regenerative status
Forward
Negative torque
Multi-function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
Function
100% of Contents
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
10
Positive torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
11
Negative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the analog
input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-43
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog input
terminal A2.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA (20 mA at input, torque limited to 100% motor rated torque).
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Regenerative torque limit
Negative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative
Fig 6.33 Torque Limit by Analog Input
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit using an
analog input.
The lowest torque limit set from among the following is enabled: Torque limit using constants, torque limit using
an analog input, 150% of Inverter rating (when set to CT), or 120% of Inverter rating (when set to VT) set in C601.
Multi-function analog input
Forward torque limit
Terminal (set value = 10)
A2
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive
torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Reverse
drive
reverse
torque
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Constants
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque
limit (L7-03)
Reverse torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque
limit (L7-04)
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Forward regenerative
torque limit
175% of Inverter rated current
Fig 6.34 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input
6-44
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting Precautions
• When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled because
torque control is given priority.
• When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this may
result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the
motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque, set
the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using H3-10.
• The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is less
than 10 Hz, accuracy is lowered.
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's output
frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or disable deceleration time using constant L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time 1) or C1-04
(Acceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Inverter Rated Output Current), the motor will
accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L3-05
Stall prevention selection
during running function
selection
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Operates according to the setting.
Motor may stall when the load is large.)
1: Enabled--Deceleration time 1 (Stall prevention
function during operation deceleration time is
set in C1-02.)
2: Enabled--Deceleration time 2 (Stall prevention
function during operation deceleration time is
set in C1-04.)
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
No
30 to 200
120%
No
A
A
No
Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. Set as a percent, taking Inverter rated current to be 100%.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory setting.
*
* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be 150%.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-45
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention during operation level), you can change the stall level during operation by setting H3-10 (Gain (Terminal A2)) and H3-11
(Bias (Terminal A2)).
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level or the
set value in constant L3-06, whichever is the smaller.
S ta ll p r e v e n tio n
le v e l d u r in g
o p e r a tio n
M u lti- fu n c tio n a n a lo g in p u t
te r m in a l A 2 in p u t le v e l
(4
m A ) (8 .8
m A )
(2 0
m A )
Fig 6.35 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
IN F O
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (over torque) or the load is suddenly lightened (under torque), you
can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, or P2-PC.
To use the over torque/under torque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (over torque/under torque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2PC function selection).
The over torque/under torque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%) in V/f control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.
6-46
F7 Instruction Manual
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L6-01
Torque detection selection
1
0: Over torque/under torque detection disabled.
1: Over torque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after over torque
(warning).
2: Over torque detected continuously during
operation; operation continues after over
torque (warning).
3: Over torque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
4: Over torque detected continuously during
operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
5: Under torque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after over torque
(warning).
6: Under torque detected continuously during
operation; operation continues after over
torque (warning).
7: Under torque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
8: Under torque detected continuously during
operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
Open-loop vector control: Motor rated torque is
set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
0 to 300
150%
No
A
A
A
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
Set the over torque/under torque detection time in
1-second units.
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
L6-04
Torque detection selection
2
0 to 4
0
No
A
A
A
0 to
300
150%
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
Output of torque detection 1 is enabled by setting
17 for H2- and output of torque detection 1 is
enabled by setting 18 or 18 for H2-.
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
Function
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
B
Over torque/under torque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Over torque detection and under torque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
17
Over torque/under torque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Over torque detection and under torque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
18
Over torque/under torque detection 2 NO
(NO contact: Over torque detection and under torque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
19
Over torque/under torque detection 2 NC
(NC contact: Over torque detection and under torque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
F7 Instruction Manual
6-47
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LED Indicators
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when over torque or under torque is detected,
and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
LED Indicator
Over torque/ Over torque/
Under torque Under torque
Detection 1
Detection 2
Function
0
Over torque/under torque detection disabled.
-
-
1
Over torque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
over torque (warning).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
2
Over torque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after over torque (warning).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
3
Over torque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit
OL4 lit
4
Over torque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit
OL4 lit
5
Under torque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
over torque (warning).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
6
Under torque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after over torque (warning).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
7
Under torque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
UL3 lit
UL4 lit
8
Under torque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
UL3 lit
UL4 lit
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for over torque and under torque detection.
• Over torque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO
or overtorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON
ON
* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
6-48
F7 Instruction Manual
• Under torque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Undertorque detection 1 NO
or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03
or
L6-06
L6-03
or
L6-06
ON
ON
The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)
Changing Over torque and Under torque Detection Levels Using an Analog
Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 7 (over torque/under
torque detection level), you can change the over torque/under torque detection level.
If you change the over torque/under torque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only over torque/
under torque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the over torque/under torque detection level using an analog input.
Detection level
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
(4 mA)
(20 mA)
Fig 6.36 Over torque/Under torque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
7
Function
Over torque/Under torque Detection Level
F7 Instruction Manual
Content at 100%
Motor rated torque (vector control), Inverter rated current (V/f control)
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-49
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
E2-01
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current in amps.
This set value becomes the base value for motor
protection, torque limit, and torque control. It is
set automatically when using auto tuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
E4-01
Motor 2 rated current
Set the motor rated current in Amps.
This set value becomes the base value for motor
protection, torque limit, and torque control. It is
set automatically when using auto tuning.
0.32
to 6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No
A
A
A
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter special motor protection
3: With applications where the power supply is
often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the
circuit cannot be protected even if this constant
has been set to 1, as the thermal value will be
reset. If multiple motors are connected to one
Inverter, set this constant to 0, and install a thermal
relay in each motor.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
L1-02
Set the electronic thermal detection time in minutes.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Motor protection time conThe factory setting is resistance at 150% for 1 min.
stant
If the motor overload resistance is clear, set the
overload resistance protection time during hot
start to suit the motor.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
1F
6-50
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Yes
Yes
Yes
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2). This
set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must select
the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load characteristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
Tolerance Load Characteristics
General-purpose
motor (standard
motor)
T o rq u e (% )
1
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
R a te d ro ta tio n s p e e d
= 1 0 0 % sp eed
S h o rt tim e 6 0 s .
3 .7 k W m a x .
5 .5 to 1 5 k W
1 8 .5 k W
Cooling Ability
m in .
8 0 % E D o r F ra m e n u m b e r M a x .
3 0 m in . s p e e d o f 2 0 0 L J m in .
5 0 % E D o r 3 0 m in .
C o n tin u o u s
F ra m e
n u m b er
M ax .
sp eed o f
2 0 0 L J
m in .
F ra m e n u m b e r M a x . sp e e d
o f 1 6 0 M J to 1 6 0 L J m in .
F ra m e n u m b e r M a x .
sp eed o f 1 3 2 M J
Use this motor for
operations using a
commercial power
supply. This motor
construction yields
best cooling effect
when operating at 50/
60 Hz.
When operating continuously at 50/60 Hz or less,
motor overload detection
(OL1) is detected. The
Inverter outputs the error
contact, and the motor
coasts to a stop.
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
when operating at
low speeds (approx.
6 Hz).
Operates continuously at 6
to 50/60 Hz.
R o ta tio n s p e e d (% )
2
Inverter motor
(constant torque)
(1:10)
R a te d ro ta tio n s p e e d
= 1 0 0 % sp eed
T o rq u e (% )
S h o rt tim e 6 0 s .
C o n tin u o u s
F ra m e n u m b e r M
sp eed o f 2 0 0 L J
F ra m
o f 1 6
ax .
m in .
e n u m
0 M J
F ra
sp e
b er M ax . sp eed
to 1 8 0 L J
m e n u m b er M ax .
ed o f 1 3 2 M J
R o ta tio n s p e e d (% )
F7 Instruction Manual
6-51
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
Tolerance Load Characteristics
3
Vector motor
(1:100)
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
R a te d ro ta tio n s p e e d
= 1 0 0 % sp eed
T o rq u e (% )
S h o rt tim e 6 0 s .
Cooling Ability
C o n tin u o u s
F ra m e n u m b e r
M ax . sp eed o f
2 0 0 L J m in .
F ra m e n u m b e r M a x . sp e e d
o f 1 6 0 M J to 1 8 0 L J
F ra m e n u m b e r M a x .
sp eed o f 1 3 2 M J
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
Operates continuously at
when operating at
0.6 to 60 Hz.
extremely low speeds
(approx. 0.6 Hz).
R o ta tio n s p e e d (% )
6-52
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot start)
electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time
(L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.37 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor, install
a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• To detect overloads in sufficient time, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (frequency).
Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to H2-03
(multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 prealarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the
overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-53
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Alarm operation selection
during motor overheating
Set H3-09 to E, and select the operation when the
input motor temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on the Digital Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
Set H3-09 to E, and select the operation when the
motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the
operation detection level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
L1-05
Motor temperature input
filter time constant
Set H3-09 to E, and set the primary delay time
constant for motor temperature (thermistor) inputs
in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
L1-03
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Class F
150
Resistance (ohms)
Class H
180
1330
Tr: Temperature threshold value
550
Tr
Tr
5
Tr
Temperature
Tr+5
Fig 6.38 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
6-54
F7 Instruction Manual
Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter time
constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
Details
OH3
Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4
Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input),
you can detect alarm OH3 or OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The
terminal connections are shown in the following diagram.
Inverter
Multi-function
contact output
Multi-function
contact input
Fault contact
output
Branch resistance
18 kΩ
Multi-function
PHC output
PTC thermistor
Fig 6.39 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input. Use this
setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-04
Name
Prohibition of reverse
operation
F7 Instruction Manual
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
6-55
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation even if an error
occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the time set in
L2-02 is exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit under voltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply to
the control panel) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit under voltage) will
not be detected.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (main circuit undervoltage (UV)
detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns
within the time for L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, main circuit undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts
when power returns during control operations.
Does not detect main circuit undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 2.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
L2-01
Momentary power loss
detection
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ride-thru time
Ridethrough time, when momentary power loss
selection (L2-01) is set to 1, in units of seconds.
Min. base block (BB) time
Set the Inverter’s minimum base block time in
units of one second, when the Inverter is restarted
after power loss ride through.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor
secondary circuit time constant.
When an over current or over voltage occurs when
starting a speed search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
Voltage recovery time
Set the time required to return the Inverter output
voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a
speed search, in units of one second.
Set the time required to recover from 0 V to the
maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s*1
No
A
A
A
Under voltage (UV) detection level
Sets the main circuit under voltage (UV) detection
level (main circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter input side to
lower the main circuit under voltage detection
level.
150 to
210
190 V
No
A
A
A
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
*2
*1
*2
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
6-56
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from the
control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss exceeds
15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit under voltage) will be detected.
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts smoothly
from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
2*1
No
A
A
A
0 to
200
120%
No
A
No
A
b3-01
Enables/disables the speed search function for the run command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
Speed search
3: Enabled, current detection
selection (cur- Speed Calculation
rent detection
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and
or speed calacceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated
culation)
speed to the specified frequency (motor direction is also
searched).
Current Detection
The speed search is started from the frequency when power
was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search current level.
b3-02
Speed search
operating current (current
detection)
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking
the Inverter rated current as 100%.
Not usually necessary to set. When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings, reduce the value.
b3-03
Speed search
deceleration
time (current
detection)
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed
search in 1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
b3-05
Speed search
wait time
(current
detection or
speed calculation)
Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contactor on the output side of the Inverter. When a speed search is
performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the
search operation is delayed by the time set here.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
L2-03
Min. base
block time
Sets the Inverter’s minimum base block time in units of one
second, when the inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor secondary
circuit time constant.
If an over current or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s *1
No
A
A
A
L2-04
Voltage
recovery time
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units of
one second.
Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum
voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s*2
No
A
A
A
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
F7 Instruction Manual
6-57
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Set
Value
Function
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
61
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed)
Current detection (Start speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
62
External search command 2
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed) (Same operation as external search command 1)
Current detection: Start speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search command was
input).
Yes
No
Yes
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the frequency
detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period when
the run command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Base block Time
(L2-03).
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search Wait
Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search.
• Constant b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When the
current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor accelerates or
decelerates to the set frequency. If the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
• If an over current (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen the
Minimum Base block Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary auto tuning for only line-to-line resis-
tance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• When using open loop vector control, always perform rotational auto tuning before using speed searches based
on estimated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after auto tuning has been performed, perform
stationary auto tuning for only line-to-line resistance again.
The motor will not rotate during stationary auto tuning or stationary auto tuning only for line-to-line
resistance is performed.
IM P O R T A N T
6-58
F7 Instruction Manual
Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to 1 or 3.
Table 6.1 Search Methods
Search Name
Search Method
Estimated Speed
Current Detection
Estimates the motor speed when the search
starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the
estimated speed to the set frequency. You can
also search including direction of motor rotation.
Starts speed search from the frequency when
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
the highest frequency, and performs speed
detection at the current level during the search.
External search command 1 and external
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation,
Command
estimating the motor speed and starting the
search from the estimated speed.
Application Precautions
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
In control method without PG, the motor may
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capacaccelerate suddenly with light loads.
ity, and high-speed motors (130 Hz min.)
Estimated Speed Search
The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals us shown below.
Run command
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Start using
speed detected
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s
Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.40 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
F7 Instruction Manual
6-59
Speed Search after Short Base block (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Base block Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
*2
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.41 Speed Search after Base block (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Base block Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Fig 6.42 Speed Search After Base block (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
Current Detection Speed Search
The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
6-60
F7 Instruction Manual
OFF
Run command
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
*
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.43 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Base block (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Base block Time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
Deceleration
reference
time set in b3-03
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) *1
*2
Fig 6.44 Speed Search After Base block (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Base block Time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 6.45 Speed Search After Base block (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
F7 Instruction Manual
6-61
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency reference
before loss when the frequency reference using an analog input is reduced 90% or more in 400 ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L4-05
6-62
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Operation when frequency
reference is missing
0: Stopped (Operation follows frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed continues (At 80% of
speed before the frequency reference was
lost.)
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference
dropped over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protection
function will operate and the auto restart will not function.
• OC (Over current)
• RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• PUF (Fuse blown)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit over voltage)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Under voltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)*
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• OL3 (Over torque)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• OL4 (Over torque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2, P1PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
L5-01
Number of auto restart
attempts
Set the number of auto restarts attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a
speed search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
No
A
A
A
L5-02
Auto restart operation
selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated
during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an error reset has
been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
• Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-63
Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors
Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating)
is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor (Type
ERF)
Description
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
D
Details
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheats or brake transistor fault)
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Yes
Yes
Yes
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration
time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration
time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
IN F O
6-64
F7 Instruction Manual
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 10°C.
The following options are available when an overheating pre-alarm occurs (L8-03 setting).
• Operation stops (major fault)
• Operation continues (minor fault) with OH alarm flashing on the digital operator.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L8-02
L8-03
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Overheat pre-alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter
overheat detection pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
50 to 130
95°C
No
A
A
A
Inverter overheat (OH)
pre-alarm operation selection
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat
pre-alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor
fault will be given in setting 3.
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
6-65
Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the
multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S7).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an input from H1-01 to H1-05
(multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
b1-01
Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse input
b1-02
Operation method selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
IN F O
6-66
F7 Instruction Manual
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Base block Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Base block command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform base block commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and
prohibit Inverter output using the base block commands.
Clear the base block command to restart the operation using speed search from previous frequency references.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Function
8
External base block NO (Normally Open contact: Base block when ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
External base block NC (Normally Closed contact: Base block when OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using base block commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Base block command
Input
Cleared
Frequency reference
Search from stored frequency reference
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.46 Base block Commands
If using base block commands with a variable load, do not frequently input base block commands during
operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
IM P O R T A N T
F7 Instruction Manual
6-67
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp
Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output frequency
at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to A
(acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON and to
store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the terminal is
turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is still
stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d4-01
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set whether or not frequencies on hold will be
recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the
power is turned ON again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the
power is turned ON again starts at the previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when the multi-function
inputs “Accel/Decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.
0 or 1
0
No
Name
Frequency reference hold
function selection
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold
Hold
Fig 6.47 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-68
F7 Instruction Manual
Application Precautions
• When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If per-
forming operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF, input the run command
with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
• When d4-01 is set to 0 and a run command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is turned
ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
• If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during positioning,
deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the UP
and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run command
selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Frequency reference upper
limit
Set the output frequency upper limit as a percent,
taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
A
A
d2-02
Frequency reference lower
limit
Set the output frequency lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
d2-03
Master speed reference
lower limit
Set the master speed frequency reference lower
limit as a percent, taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
d2-01
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S7 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function input
selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-69
Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower limits
set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference terminal A1
becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal
A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger lower limit will
become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the fre-
quency reference lower limit.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using the
UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON
and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored. To reset
(i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the run command is
ON.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant
Name
Set Value
H1-01
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
10
H1-02
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
11
Inverter
Forward
operation/Stop
Reverse
operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
0 to 10 V analog
signal
Sequence
common
Frequency
reference lower limit
Fig 6.48 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-70
F7 Instruction Manual
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Frequency
matching signal*
Power supply
* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the run command is ON.
Fig 6.49 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
F7 Instruction Manual
6-71
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/- Speed
Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to S7
function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be sure to
allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can be
used as a pair.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d4-02
Name
Description
Setting
Range
+/- speed limits
Set the frequency to be add to or subtracted
from the analog frequency reference as a percent, taking the maximum output frequency to
be 100%.
Enabled when the increase (+) speed command
or decrease (-) speed command is set for a
multi-function input.
0 to 100
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
10%
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Constant
Number
299H
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown below.
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
OFF
ON
Frequency Reference
Application Precautions
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is from
an analog input.
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi-func-
tion contact input terminal S3 to S7, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will occur.
6-72
F7 Instruction Manual
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E (sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal is
turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.50 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same time.
If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will
occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100 ms minimum.
If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-73
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals. Set
one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 2
(Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the Inverter
is stopped.
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the following constants.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 2
(Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
OFF
Inverter
(Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.)
ON
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/
RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/OFF
operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d1-17
6-74
Name
Jog frequency reference
Description
The frequency reference when the jog frequency
reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG
command is ON.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
400.00
6.00 Hz
Yes
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Q
Q
Q
F7 Instruction Manual
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Function
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the Inverter
stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Peripheral Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Error Function)
The external error function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external error signal. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External error detection method
• Operation during external error detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-.
Set
Value
20
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
21
22
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
29
F7 Instruction Manual
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
27
28
Yes
Yes
25
26
Yes
Yes
23
24
NC Contact
Error Detection Method
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 2.)
Detection
DecelerCoast to
EmerContinue
Constant
During
ate to Stop
Stop
gency Stop Operation
Detection
Operation
(Error)
(Error)
(Error)
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-75
Set
Value
2A
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
2B
2C
Yes
Yes
2D
2E
2F
NC Contact
Error Detection Method
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 2.)
Detection
DecelerCoast to
EmerContinue
Constant
During
ate to Stop
Stop
gency Stop Operation
Detection
Operation
(Error)
(Error)
(Error)
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note1.Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2.Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6-76
F7 Instruction Manual
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-) from terminal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 17, 23, 25,
29, 30, 31 are not used.
1 to 40
2
No
A
A
A
Gain (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage
level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A
meter calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage
level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A
meter calibration function is available.
-10.0 to
+10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-) from terminal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 17, 23, 25,
29, 30, 31, 35 are not used.
1 to 40
3
No
A
A
A
Gain (terminal AM)
Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output
as the 100% output for the monitor items. The
maimum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter
calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
Q
Q
Q
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
Set the multi-function analog output 2 voltage
level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A
meter calibration function is available.
-10.0 to
+10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal
level selection
Sets the signal output level for multi-function
output 1 (terminal FM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
1: 0 to ±10 V output
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
H4-01
H4-02
H4-05
Name
F7 Instruction Manual
6-77
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Effective when the Analog Monitor Card is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor item to be output.
(U1-)
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for outputting monitor
items.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 17, 23, 25,
29, 30, 31, 35 are not used.
When the AO-12 Analog Monitor Card is used,
outputs of ±10 V are possible. To output ±10 V, set
F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO-08 Analog
Monior Card is used, only outputs of 0 to +10 V
are possible.
A meter calibration function is available.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 40
2
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
1 to 40
3
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
A
A
A
F4-01
Channel 1 monitor selection
F4-02
Channel 1 gain
F4-03
Channel 2 monitor selection
F4-04
Channel 2 gain
F4-05
Channel 1 output monitor
bias
Set the channel 1 item bias to 100%/10 V when
the analog monitor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
F4-06
Channel 2 output monitor
bias
Set the channel 2 item bias to 100%/10 V when
the analog monitor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
F4-08
Analog output signal level
for channel 2
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the values for the part of U1- (status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor cards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of constants, and set the values.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias
in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Analog Output
Option Cards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, and F4-06.
6-78
F7 Instruction Manual
Adjusting the Meter
Display the data setting display for the gain and bias constants corresponding to the output channel of the Inverter
Unit and the AO Option Card while the Inverter is stopped to output the following voltages to the analog monitor
terminal. This will enable meter adjusting while the Inverter is stopped.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain + output bias
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item
Fig 6.51 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
Monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+), and 0
to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V, refer to
Chapter 5 User Constants.
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option
terminals.
IN F O
F7 Instruction Manual
6-79
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor constants.
Related Constants
H6-06
H6-07
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Pulse train monitor selection
Select the pulse train monitor output items (value
of the part of U1-).
There are two types of monitor items: Speedrelated items and PID-related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24, 36
2
Yes
A
A
A
Pulse train monitor scaling
Set the number of pulses output when speed is
100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to make the pulse
train monitor output synchronously to the output
frequency.
0 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Output digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Refer to
Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the part of U1- (Status monitor). The possible monitor selections are
limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Set the pulse frequency output when 100%
frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.
Application Precautions
When using a pulse monitor constant, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions. If the
load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Using a Sourcing Output
6-80
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
Load Impedance (kΩ)
+5 V min.
1.5 kΩ min.
+8 V min.
3.5 kΩ min.
+10 V min.
10 kΩ min.
Load impedance
MP
VRL
AC
F7 Instruction Manual
External power supply
Using a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
12 VDC±10%,
15 VDC±10%
Sink Current (mA)
16 mA Max
Load impedance
MP
Sinking current
AC
F7 Instruction Manual
6-81
Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar
devices using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and up to 31 slaves. Serial communications
between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address of
each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
MEMOCON-series PLC
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
RS-485 connections
example
Fig 6.52 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Interface
RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
6-82
Specifications
Baud rate:
Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
8 bits fixed
Parity:
Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits:
1 bit fixed
Communications Protocol
MEMOBUS (RTU mode only)
Number of Connectable Units
31 units max. (when using RS-485)
F7 Instruction Manual
Communications Connection Terminal
MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance by
turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
S+
+
-
SRS-422A
or RS-485
R+
R-
S1
O
F
F
OFF
1
2
ON
Terminating
resistance
Switch
1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.53 Communications Connection Terminal
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal,
and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
I M P O R T 3.
A When
N T using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
R+
R
S+
S
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does
not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master
again.
IN F O
F7 Instruction Manual
6-83
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
b1-01
Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
b1-02
Operation method selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
H5-01
Station address
Set the Inverter station address.
0 to 20
1F
No
A
A
A
H5-02
Baud rate selection
Set the baud rate for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
H5-03
Communications parity
selection
Set the parity for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
H5-04
Communication error
detection selection
Set the stopping method for communications
errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in
C1-02
1: Coast to a stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C102
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
H5-05
Communications error
detection selection
Set whether or not a communications time out is to
be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
H5-06
Send wait time
Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to
when the Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65
ms
5 ms
No
A
A
A
H5-07
RTS control ON/OFF
Select to enable or disable RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
*
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands input
from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.
6-84
F7 Instruction Manual
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message
format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is changed by
the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following.
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 24 bits long
setting
5 ms min.
Fig 6.54 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the Inverter
will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H
Read storage register contents
8
8
7
37
08H
Loop back test
8
8
8
8
10H
Write multiple storage registers
11
41
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loop back address) and the
data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-85
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set the
factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the
response messages.
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting
from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower place
8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
83H
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
20H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
04H
Higher
place
45H
Lower
place
F0H
Data quantity
Lead storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
6-86
Response Message
(During Error)
08H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
65H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
01H
Lower
place
F4H
Higher
place
AFH
Lower
place
82H
Error code
CRC-16
03H
Higher
place
F1H
Lower
place
31H
F7 Instruction Manual
Loop back Test
The loop back test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loop back test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Function code
08H
Function code
08H
Function code
89H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
A5H
Lower
place
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
A5H
37H
Lower
place
37H
Higher
place
DAH
Higher
place
DAH
Lower
place
8DH
Lower
place
8DH
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Error Code
CRC-16
01H
Higher
place
86H
Lower
place
50H
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must be in
the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage register
address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency reference
of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
01H
10H
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
No. of data
Lead data
Higher
place
Lower
place
F7 Instruction Manual
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
10H
Higher
00H
place
Start
Address
Lower
01H
place
Higher
00H
place
Quantity
Lower
02H
place
Higher
10H
place
CRC-16
Lower
08H
place
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
90H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
place
Lower
place
02H
CDH
C1H
01H
6-87
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
Next data
CRC-16
02H
58H
63H
39H
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.
IN F O
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No.
0000H
Contents
Reserved
Frequency reference
0001H
Bit 0
Run/stop command
1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Forward/reverse operation
1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2
External error
1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Error reset
1: Reset command
Bit 4
ComNet
Bit 5
ComCtrl
Bit 6
Multi-function input command 3
Bit 7
Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8
Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9
Multi-function input command 6
Bit A
Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F
0002H
Not used
Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
6-88
0006H
PID target value
0007H
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726)
0008H
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726)
F7 Instruction Manual
Register No.
Contents
Multi-function contact output setting
0009H
Bit 0
Contact output (Terminal M1-M2)
Bit 1
PHC1(Contact P1-PC)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
PHC2(Contact P2-PC)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 3 to 5
1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Bit 6
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
Bits 8 to F
1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
000FH
Bit 0
Not used
Bit 1
Input PID target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 3 to B
Not used
C
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F
Not used
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
Contents
Inverter status
0020H
Bit 0
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3
Error 1: Error
Bit 4
Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5
Multi-function contact output (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6
Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminal P2 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F
F7 Instruction Manual
Not used
6-89
Register No.
Contents
Error details
0021H
Bit 0
Over current (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1
Main circuit over voltage (OV)
Bit 2
Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4
Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5
Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6
PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7
External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8
Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9
Motor overload (OL1) or over torque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit A
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Bit B
Main circuit under voltage (UV) detected
Bit C
Main circuit under voltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D
Missing output phase (LF)
Bit E
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Data link status
0022H
Bit 0
Writing data
Bit 1
Not used
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4
Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F
6-90
Not used
0023H
Frequency reference
Monitors U1-01
0024H
Output frequency
Monitors U1-02
0025H
Output voltage reference (U1-06)
0026H
Output current
U1-03
0027H
Output power
U1-08
0028H
Torque reference
U1-09
0029H
Not used
002AH
Not used
F7 Instruction Manual
Register No.
Contents
Sequence input status
002BH
Bit 0
Multi-function contact input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Multi-function contact input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Multi-function contact input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
Multi-function contact input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F
Not used
Inverter status
002CH
Bit 0
Operation
1: Operating
Bit 1
Zero speed
1: Zero speed
Bit 2
Frequency matching
1: Matched
Bit 3
User-defined speed matching
1: Matched
Bit 4
Frequency detection 1
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5
Frequency detection 2
Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6
Inverter startup completed
1: Startup completed
Bit 7
Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8
Base block
1: Inverter output base block
Bit 9
Frequency reference mode
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A
Run command mode
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B
Over torque detection
1: Detected
Bit C
Frequency reference lost
1: Lost
Bit D
Retrying error
1: Retrying
Bit E
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
002DH
Bit 0
Multi-function contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Terminal function PHC output 1 (terminal P1-PC): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Terminal function PHC output 2 (terminal P1-PC): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 3 to F
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H - 0037H
Not used
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Not used
0038H
PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H
PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH
PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
F7 Instruction Manual
6-91
Register No.
Contents
003BH
CPU software number
003CH
Flash software number
Communications error details
003DH
Bit 0
CRC error
Bit 1
Invalid data length
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Parity error
Bit 4
Overrun error
Bit 5
Framing error
Bit 6
Time-out
Bits 7 to F
Not used
003EH
KVA setting
003FH
Control method
Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
Operation signal
Bit 0
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3
0001H
Bit 4
External error 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Bit 5
Error reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B
0002H
Not used
Not used
Bit C
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Bit E
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Bit F
Not used.
Frequency reference
30000/100%
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
6-92
F7 Instruction Manual
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area, use the
ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and ENTER
commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as enabling data in
RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No.
Contents
0900H
Write constant data to EEPROM
0910H
Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
IN F O
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
F7 Instruction Manual
6-93
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during main circuit under voltage (UV) error
• Writing constants from the PLC during UV (main circuit under voltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit under voltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is sent to
the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the master.
6-94
F7 Instruction Manual
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits.
This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts
of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if communications are being
performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal
S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
Fig 6.55 Details of Communications Terminals
During normal operation, the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value.
If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the
error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-95
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC can be designated as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer function
input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 12
(timer function output).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
b4-01
Timer function ON-delay
time
Set the timer function output ON delay time (dead
band) for the timer function input in 1-second
units. Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 and H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
b4-02
Timer function OFF-delay
time
Set the timer function output OFF delay time
(dead band) for the timer function input in 1-second units. Enabled when the timer function is set
in H1- and H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is turned
ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function is
turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.56 Timer Function Operation Example
6-96
F7 Instruction Manual
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining
proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets (machinery)
with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P control
Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control
Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control
Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid
variations.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the
target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PID control
Amount of operation
I control
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.57 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application
Control Details
Example of Sensor Used
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
Speed Con• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs
trol
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Tachometer generator
Pressure
Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control.
Pressure sensor
Flow Rate
Control
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately.
Flow rate sensor
F7 Instruction Manual
6-97
Application
Temperature Control
6-98
Control Details
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control
by rotating the fan.
Example of Sensor Used
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
F7 Instruction Manual
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
b5-01
PID control mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled (frequency reference +
PID output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled (frequency reference +
PID output, D control of feedback value).
0 to 4
0
No
A
A
A
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when the setting is
0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
b5-03
Integral (I) time
Sets I-control integral time in 1-second units.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
b5-05
Derivative (D) time
Sets D-control derivative time in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed when the setting is
0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
b5-06
PID limit
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
b5-07
PID offset adjustment
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage
of the maximum outut frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
b5-08
PID primary delay time
constant
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PIDcontrol outputs in 1-second units.
Not usually necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
b5-09
PID output characteristics
selection
Select forward/reverse for PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse (highlights the output
code)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
b5-10
PID output gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
b5-11
PID reverse output selection
0: 0 limit when PID output is negative.
1: Reverse when PID output is negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is selected using b104.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
0: No detection of loss of PID feedback
1: Detection of loss of PID feedback. Operation
continues during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID feedback. Coasts to
stop during detection, and fault contact operates.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 100
0%
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
b5-12
Selection of PID feedback
command loss detection
b5-13
PID feedback command
loss detection level
Set the PID feedback loss detection level as a percent, with the maximum output frequency at
100%.
b5-14
PID feedback command
loss detection time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s
units.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
b5-15
PID sleep function operation level
Set the PID sleep function start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
b5-16
PID sleep operation delay
time
Set the delay time until the PID sleep function
starts in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
b5-17
Accel/decel time for PID
reference
Set the accel/decel time for PID reference in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
H6-01
Pulse train input function
selection
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
6-99
Constant
Number
Name
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
Description
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
U1-24
PID feedback value
Monitors the feedback value when
PID control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V
possible)
0.01%
A
A
A
U1-36
PID input volume
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/100%
10 V: Max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V
possible)
0.01%
A
A
A
U1-37
PID output volume
PID control output
Given as maximum frequency/100%
10 V: Max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V
possible)
0.01%
A
A
A
U1-38
PID command
PID command + PID command bias
Given as maximum frequency/100%
10 V: Max. frequency
0.01%
A
A
A
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Function
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Integral hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Function
B
PID feedback
Max. output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
C
PID target value
Max. output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
6-100
Control Method
1
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID
target value and feedback value.
2
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
3
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
difference between PID target value and feedback value.
4
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
F7 Instruction Manual
PID Input Methods
Enable PID control using constant b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2 Input
Set H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input function
selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value
from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-function analog input
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
IN F O
PID Adjustment Methods
Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response waveform.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-101
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time (D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-102
F7 Instruction Manual
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D) set
value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional
gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed, and the machine may be damaged
or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum output
frequency to be 100%.
• Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent
machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this
case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to reduce
Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value, you
can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
• Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of com-
pensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
• When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to invert the Inverter’s output. When b1-04
(Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can increase
or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/deceleration function (constant C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens, reduce constant C1 until
hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-17. Also, you can disable the
set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multi-function input set value 34 (PID
soft starter).
F7 Instruction Manual
6-103
6-104
Pulse input terminal RP
Frequency reference
terminal A2 PID feedback
Terminal 16 or 14 PID
target value
MEMOBUS communications
register 06 H PID target value
Pulse input terminal RP
D1-16
D1-02
D1-01
Terminal A1
Serial Com
Option Card
Select multi-function inputs
PID input characteristics
Proportional
gain (P)
b5-02
Derivative
time
Integral (I) time
Store integral using
multi-function inputs
PID command (U1-38)
Integral rset using
multi-function inputs
Multi-function input PID control cancel
signal is ON. PID is OFF under the
following conditions:
b5-01 = 0
During JDG command input
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
PID input volume
(U1-36)
Set bit 1 of MEMOBUS
register 0FH to 1
Set PID target value in
multi-function analog input
PID SFS Cancel
Frequency reference
using multi-step command
PID limit
b5-06
PID output
gain (b5-10)
PID output monitor
(U1-37)
Output frequency
PID offset
adjustment (b5-07)
Select PID output
characteristics selection
(b5-09)
PID primary delay
time constant
Lower limit
Uppwer limit
Lower limit 0
Upper limit
Enable/disable reverse operation
when PI output is negative
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
Fig 6.58 PID Control Block
F7 Instruction Manual
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost, the
Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator
and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection
level
b5-13)
Time
No FbL
detection
Loss detection time
b5-14)
FbL detection
Loss detection time
b5-14)
Fig 6.59 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID control
target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time continues
and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function, select
decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID target value
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation
delay time
Sleep operation
delay time
b5-16
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation
b5-16
Stopped
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.60 PID Sleep Time Chart
F7 Instruction Manual
6-105
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be performed using both V/f control and open loop vector control. The constants to be adjusted are different for each. In
V/f control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in open loop vector, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Constants
Factory
Setting
Change
During
Operation
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Energy-saving
gain
Set the energy-saving gain with the open loop vector
control method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
*1
Yes
No
No
A
b8-03
Energy-saving
filter time constant
Set the energy-saving filter time constant with the open
loop vector control method.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
*2
Yes
No
No
A
b8-04
Energy-saving
coefficient
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
Set the motor rated capacity in E2-11, and adjust the
value by 5% at a time until output power reaches a minimum value.
0.0 to
655.00*3
*4
No
A
A
No
b8-05
Power detection filter time
constant
Set the time constant for output power detection.
0 to 2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
b8-06
Search operation voltage
limiter
Set the limit value of the voltage control range during
search operation.
Perform search operation to optimize operations using
minute variations in voltage using energy-saving control. Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the
motor base voltage.
0 to 100
0%
No
A
A
No
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
During
Operation
Name
b8-01
Energy-saving
mode selection
b8-02
*
*
*
*
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
1.
2.
3.
4.
Details
The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
No.
Constant
No.
Name
Details
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
E2-02
Sets the motor rated slip in hertz. These set values will
Motor rated slip become the reference values for slip compensation. This
constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*
No
A
A
A
E2-11
Motor rated
output
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*
No
Q
Q
Q
Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically set during auto tuning.
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
6-106
F7 Instruction Manual
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method. Refer
to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control Method
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor capac-
ity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output). Also,
adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving coefficient, the
greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-05 is
set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Consequently,
control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage using the search
operation. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that control the voltage using
the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for 400 V Class Inverters, set
the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Open loop vector control
In open loop vector control, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor effi-
ciency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in b8-02
(Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
F7 Instruction Manual
6-107
Setting Motor Constants
In vector control method, the motor constants are set automatically using auto tuning. If auto tuning does not complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.
These set values will become the reference values
for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units.
These set values will become the reference values
for slip compensation.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*1
No
A
A
A
E2-03
Motor no-load current
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
No
A
A
A
E2-04
Number of motor poles
(Number of poles)
Sets the number of motor poles.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
Q
No
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in Ω
units.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842 Ω
*1
No
A
A
A
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
No
No
No
A
E2-07
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50%
Motor iron saturation coef- of magnetic flux.
ficient 1
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
0.50
No
No
No
A
E2-08
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75%
Motor iron saturation coef- of magnetic flux.
ficient 2
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.75
0.75
No
No
No
A
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
0 to
65535
14 W
*1
No
A
A
No
E2-01
Note
* 1.
* 2.
* 3.
6-108
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
Name
Sets motor iron loss in W units.
All factory-set constants are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
The setting range depends on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
F7 Instruction Manual
Manual Motor Constant Setting Methods
The motor constants settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (r/min) x No. of motor poles/120.
Motor No-Load Current Setting
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current is
not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting
E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG is selected. Set the number of motor poles (number of
poles) as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance auto tuning. When you cannot perform tuning,
consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resistance
value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
• E-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor rated
voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not written on the
motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically using auto tuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting
E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in V/f
control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-109
Setting the V/f Pattern
In V/f control method, you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
*
*
*
*
*
6-110
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt. This setting
is used as a reference value in protection functions.
155 to
255
*1
200 V
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset V/f patterns.
F:
Custom user-set patterns (Application for
settings E1-04 to E1-10.)
0 to F
F
No
Q
Q
No
E1-04
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
40.0 to
400.0 *5
60.0 Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
Max. voltage (VMAX)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0 V
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-06
Base frequency (FA)
0.0 to
400.0
60.0 Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
0.0 to
255.0
*1
3.0 Hz
*2
No
A
A
A
E1-08
Mid. output frequency
voltage
0.0 to
400.0
11.0 V
*1
*2
No
A
A
A
E1-09
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
0.0 to
400.0
0.5 Hz
*2
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-10
Min. output frequency
voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1
*2
No
A
A
A
E1-11
Mid. output frequency 2
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
*3
No
A
A
A
E1-12
Mid. output frequency
voltage 2
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*3
No
A
A
A
E1-13
Base voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*4
No
A
A
Q
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the
same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in
the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA)
>E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range.
Normally, this setting is not required.
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
The contents of constants E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by auto tuning.
When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
F7 Instruction Manual
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the standard value for the protection function and similar functions.
Setting V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern in E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern: Select one of the 15 pattern types
(set value: 0 to E) that have been set beforehand, or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is set to
1.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic
Constant Torque
Characteristic
Variable torque
characteristic
High Startup
Torque (See
Note)*
Fixed Output
Operation
Application
This pattern is used in general applications.
Used when the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, for linear transport
systems.
This pattern is used for loads with torque
proportional to two or three times the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern
only in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup (elevator loads, etc.)
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less
than optimum.
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60
Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
Set
Value
Specifications
0
50 Hz specifications
1 (F)
60 Hz specifications
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
3
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
4
50 Hz specifications,× 3 decrement
5
50 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
6
60 Hz specifications, × 3 decrement
7
60 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
8
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
9
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
A
60 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
B
60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
C
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
D
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
E
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are three
types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-111
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
6-112
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
F7 Instruction Manual
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8
F7 Instruction Manual
50 Hz
Set Value 9
6-113
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
6-114
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
F7 Instruction Manual
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8
F7 Instruction Manual
50 Hz
Set Value 9
6-115
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to anything
other than F, you can only refer to constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set E1-07 and E109 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
(VMAX)
E1-13
(V Base)
E1-08
(VC)
E1-10
(VMIN)
E1-09
(FMIN)
E1-07
(FB)
E1-06
(FA)
E1-04
(FMAX)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.61 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that control
method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-116
F7 Instruction Manual
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions
You can set Digital Operator-related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function selections, and copy functions.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
o1-02
Name
Monitor selection
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 4
1
Yes
A
A
A
0 to
39999
0
No
A
A
A
Set the run method selection key (LOCAL/
REMOTE Key) function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and the constant settings.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
Description
Set the monitor item to be displayed when the
power supply is turned ON.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the
frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0:
0.01 Hz units
1:
0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
r/min units (Sets the motor poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value
is 200.0, set 12000.
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key
enable/disable
o2-02
STOP Key during control
circuit terminal operation
Set the STOP Key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued
from an external terminal, the Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
User constant initial value
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital
Operator frequency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency
reference without Enter Key operation.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
o2-03
F7 Instruction Manual
6-117
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
o2-05
Frequency reference setting method selection
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is
disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the
Digital Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at Digital Operator
disconnection.
Inverter output is cut off, and fault contact is
operated.)
o2-07
Cumulative operation time
setting
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
0 to
65535
0
No
A
A
A
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using
time units.
The operation time accumulates from the set
value.
0 to
65535
0
No
A
A
A
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units for
the following constants using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using constant o1-02, select the monitor item (U1- [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital Operator
when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1- in Chapter 5 User Constants.
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-03
(Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter reference
inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02 (Operation
Method Selection).
6-118
F7 Instruction Manual
Initializing Changed Constant Values
You can save to the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the set
values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter
Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can
increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter Key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to increment
the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s thereafter. Press
and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s after that. The frequency
reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling Fan
Operating Time).
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
o3-01
Copy function selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
No
A
A
A
o3-02
Read permitted selection
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
6-119
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.
Table 6.2 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the
constants monitor display.
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the
constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER
Key. The READ function will start.
7
If the READ function ends normally, End is
displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o301 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and
return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when
Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
6-120
F7 Instruction Manual
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you set
o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write operation
will be stopped.
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the following
method.
Table 6.3 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the
constants monitor display.
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the
constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER
Key. The COPY function will start.
7
If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-01
is automatically reset to 0, and then the display
returns to o3-01.
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, set the constants again. Error displays and
their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-121
Error Display
Meaning
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control method stored
in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator
shows they are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area and the
sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different.
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following
method.
Table 6.4 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
6-122
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the
constants monitor display.
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the
function setting display.
5
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER
Key. The VERIFY function will start.
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is
displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o301 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
F7 Instruction Manual
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and
return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when
Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Application Precautions
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the Digital
Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number
• Control method
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using the
Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection)
to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal that has been
set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is prohibited. You
can, however, reference constants.
Constant
Number
A1-01
Name
Constant access level
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be
read and set.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick
programming mode and advanced programming (A) mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or change
the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
F7 Instruction Manual
6-123
Related Constants
A1-01
A1-04
A1-05
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Constant access level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be
read and set.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick
programming mode and advanced programming (A) mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
A
A
A
Password
Password input when a password has been set in
A1-05.
This function write-protects some constants of the
initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 and
A2-01 to A2-32 constants can no longer be
changed. (Programming mode constants can be
changed.)
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A
A
Password setting
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the
password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the
RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET Key
and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
Displaying User-set Constants Only
You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 constants (user-set constants) and
A1-01 (Constants Access Level).
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can set
and refer to constants set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
A2-01
to
A2-32
6-124
Name
User setting constants
Description
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/
read. Maximum 32.
Effective when the access level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Constants set in A2-01 to A232 can be set/read in programming mode.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
b1-01
to
o2-08
-
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
F7 Instruction Manual
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
PG constant
Set the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder)
pulses. Sets the number of pulses per motor revolution.
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Q
No
Operation selection at PG
open circuit (PGO)
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or
machinery, do not make this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
Operation selection at
overspeed (OS)
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS)
fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or
machinery, do not make this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
F1-04
Operation selection at
deviation (DEV)
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop (Deceleration stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop (Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and
operation continued.)
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
F1-05
PG rotation
0: Phase A leads with forward run command.
(Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with forward run command.
(Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
1 to 132
1
No
No
A
No
Constant
Number
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
Name
Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control
card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1 + n)/m
(n = 0 or 1, m = 1 to 32)
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse
monitor)
F1-06
n
m
This constant is effective only when a PG-B2 is
used.
The possible division ratio settings are 1/32 ≤ F106 ≤ 1
F7 Instruction Manual
6-125
Constant
Number
Name
F1-07
F1-08
Overspeed (OS) detection
level
F1-09
Overspeed detection delay
time (OS)
F1-10
Excessive speed deviation
(DEV) detection level
F1-11
Excessive speed deviation
detection delay time
(DEV)
F1-12
Number of PG gear teeth 1 Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are
gears between the PG and the motor.
F1-13
Number of PG gear teeth 2
F1-14
PG open-circuit detection
time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
0 to 120
115%
No
No
A
No
0.0 to 2.0
1.0 s
No
No
A
No
0 to 50
10%
No
No
A
No
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
0
No
No
A
No
0
No
No
A
No
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
Description
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral function isn't used
Integral value during accel/
while accelerating or decelerating; it is used at
decel enable/disable
constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function is used at all
times.)
Sets the overspeed detection method.
Frequencies above that set for F1-08 (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that
continue to exceed this frequency for the time set
in F1-09 are detected as overspeed faults.
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the F1-10 set level
(set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is
detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference between actual
motor speed and the reference command speed.
Input pulses input from PG 60
F1-01
F1-13
F1-12
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Change
during
Operation
0 to 1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these constants is set to 0.
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time.
PGO will be detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.
0.0 to
10.0
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
• PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-33.
Setting Number of PG Pulses
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or B-phase
pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.
6-126
F7 Instruction Manual
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction
Constant F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
Inverter
Motor
PG (encoder)
Forward
command
Pulse output
A-phase driven when set value = 0
B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase
A-phase
B-phase
B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Forward
command
Motor output axis rotates
counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rotation is
counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when forward commands are output. Consequently, when
motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase driven when a load
is not applied.
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor
Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can operate
the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated using
the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (r/min.) = No. of input pulses from PC × 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on load side)
/ F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Matching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and deceleration, set F1-07 to 1.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-127
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
IM P O R T A N T
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse
monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2 digits. The
dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =
n
m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is 1/2
(set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.
6-128
F7 Instruction Manual
Detecting PG Open Circuit
Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection time.
When the Inverter is operating with the frequency reference set to 1% minimum (except when operating on direct
current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Motor Overspeed
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is
detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09. After
detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the
speed reference and actual work piece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the set
value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter
stops according to the setting in F1-04.
Using Digital Output Cards
There are two types of Inverter digital output cards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photo coupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
Inverter
control
panel 3CN
+24 V
TD
Inverter
control
panel 3CN
NC NO
3CN
NC NO
3CN
Photocoupler TD5
CH1
TD6
CH2
TD7
CH3
TD8
CH4
3
TD9
CH5
4
TD10
TD11
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
1
2
5
6
CH1
CH2
Relay contact
DO-02C Digital Output Card
Photocoupler
CH6
COM (0 V common)
CH7
Relay contact
CH8
DO-08 Digital Output Card
Fig 6.62 Digital Output Cards
F7 Instruction Manual
6-129
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
Effective when a Digital Output Card (DO-2 or
DO-08) is used.
Set the numbers of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
0
No
A
A
A
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
Effective when a Digital Output Card (DO-2 or
DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
1
No
A
A
A
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
F5-04
Channel 4 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
4
No
A
A
A
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
37
No
A
A
A
F5-07
Channel 7 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
F5-08
Channel 8 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be
output.
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
DO-08 output mode
selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is
used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
F5-09
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Card
If using DO-02C Digital Output Card, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Card
If using DO-08 Digital Output Card, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting in F509.
6-130
F7 Instruction Manual
F5-09 Set to 0
Set Value
0: 8 separate
outputs
Terminal
Number
Output Details
TD5-TD11
Over current (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11
Over voltage (OV)
TD7-TD11
Inverter overload (OL2)
TD8-TD11
Fuse blown (PUF)
TD9-TD11
Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11
Inverter overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2
Zero speed detected
TD3-TD4
Speed agreement
F5-09 Set to 1
Set Value
1: Binary code
output
Terminal
Number
Output Details
TD5-TD11
bit 0
TD6-TD11
bit 1
TD7-TD11
bit 2
TD8-TD11
bit 3
TD9-TD11
Zero speed detected
TD10-TD11
Speed agreement
TD1-TD2
Operating
TD3-TD4
Minor fault
Encoded output
(Refer to table below)
The following table shows the code outputs.
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
0000
No error
1000
External error (EFxx)
0001
Over current (SC, OC, GF)
1001
Controller error (CPFxx)
0010
Over voltage (OV)
1010
Motor overload (OL1)
0011
Inverter overload (OL2)
1011
Not used
0100
Inverter overheated (OH, OH1)
1100
Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
0101
Overspeed (OS)
1101
Speed deviation (DEV)
0110
Fuse blown (PUF)
1110
PG open circuit (PGO)
0111
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
1111
Not used
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
F7 Instruction Manual
6-131
Notes:
6-132
F7 Instruction Manual
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the alarm and fault displays, explanations for fault conditions and corrective actions to be taken if the inverter and/or motor malfunctions.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions........................... 7-2
Troubleshooting......................................................... 7-17
F7 Instruction Manual
7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm
detection, operation error detection, and auto tuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault output contact closes, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the
motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method
will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and close the Fault Reset signal.
• Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Display
7-2
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
Over current
The Inverter output current exceeded
the over current detection level.
(200% of rated current)
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the accelera- Reset the fault after correcting its
tion/deceleration time is too short. cause.
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output.
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
output. (A ground fault can be caused Reset the fault after correcting its
by motor burn damage, worn insula- cause.
tion, or a damaged cable.)
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit
between the following terminals. A
short-circuit will damage the output
transistor:
3)ÅÅU,V,W
B1(
ÅÅU,V,W
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Main Circuit Over voltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
the over voltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 410 V
400 V class: Approx. 820 V
Main Circuit Under voltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
the Under voltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
400 V class: Approx. 380 V
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during
Inverter operation.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage
dropped.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
The deceleration time is too short and Increase the deceleration time or
the regenerative energy from the
connect a braking resistor (or
motor is too large.
Braking Resistor Unit).
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the input voltage so it is
within specifications.
• An open-phase occurred on the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
---
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
Overheating occurred in the inrush
resistor.
The MC did not respond for 10 s even • The MC in the main circuit failed.
though the MC ON signal has been
• The MC excitation coil is burned
output.
out.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
• An open-phase occurred in the input
power supply.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
• A momentary power loss occurred.
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates • The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
unusually (not when regenerating).
power supply are loose.
cause.
This fault is detected when L8-05 is
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
set to "Enabled."
power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases
is bad.
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is
set to "Enabled."
F7 Instruction Manual
• There is a broken wire in the output
cable.
Reset the fault after correcting its
• There is a broken wire in the motorcause.
winding.
• The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity
less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
Check the motor and Inverter
capacity.
7-3
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
(
)
Meaning
Probable Causes
Cooling Fin Overheating
The ambient temperature is too high.
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02 There is a heat source nearby.
or 105°C.
OH: The temperature exceeded the
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can
be changed by L8-03.).
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
OH1: The temperature exceeded
100°C (Stopping method: Coast to
stop).
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
Corrective Actions
Install a cooling unit.
Remove the heat source.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
our sales representative.)
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Inverter will stop or will continue
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of
L1-03.
Motor Overheating Fault
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
setting of L1-04.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A1 and A2.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A1 and A2.
Installed Braking Resistor Over• Reduce the load, increase the
heating
The deceleration time is too short and
deceleration time, or reduce the
The braking resistor is overheated and the regenerative energy from the
motor speed.
the protection function has operated if motor is too large.
• Change to a Braking Resistor
it has been enabled in L8-01.
Unit.
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating
properly.
-
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
The load is too heavy. The acceleraCheck the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, decelertime are too short.
ation, and cycle times.
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection funcThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is
incorrect.
7-4
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle
time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection funcThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Over torque Detected 1
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
Over torque Detected 2
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
setting in L6-06.
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
Under torque Detected 1
There has been a current less than the
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
Under torque Detected 2
There has been a current less than the
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
setting in L6-06.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
setting in F1-09.
F7 Instruction Manual
Check the V/f characteristics.
Replace the Inverter with one that
has a larger capacity.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the over
torque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the over
torque.
The inertia returned to the load is too
large.
• Make sure the load is an inertial
load.
• Set the system so that the deceleration time that does not produce 0 V is 120 s or less.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the over
torque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the over
torque.
Overshooting/Undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and
reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and
appropriate.
F1-09.
7-5
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency
(soft start output ≥ E1-09).
Probable Causes
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too heavy.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
Corrective Actions
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration Lengthen the acceleration time
time are too short.
and deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and
appropriate.
F1-11.
-
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a
deceleration stop during open-loop
vector control.
-
Check the motor constants.
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
-
-
External fault input from Communications Option Card
-
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications
signals.
External fault (Input terminal 3)
External fault (Input terminal 4)
External fault (Input terminal 5)
An "external fault" was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
External fault (Input terminal 6)
• Reset external fault inputs to the
multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
External fault (Input terminal 7)
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator
was broken during operation for a
RUN command from the Digital
Operator.
7-6
-
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal reception was not possible
for 2 s or longer after control data was
received once.
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected
during a run command or while setting
a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card.
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5
seconds after the power was turned
on.
CPU External RAM Fault
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications
error with the Digital Operator for
more than 2 seconds.
Base block circuit error
Probable Causes
-
-
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
-
Option Card connection error
ASIC internal RAM fault
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected
properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
-
-
-
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
The control circuit is damaged.
F7 Instruction Manual
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed.
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU internal A/D converter error
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU internal A/D converter error
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't
connected properly.
The control circuit is damaged.
EEPROM error
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
7-7
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Watchdog timer fault
Probable Causes
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault
ASIC version fault
Communications Option Card A/D
converter error
-
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter control circuit is faulty
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Option Card's A/D converter is
faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the Option Card.
Communications Option Card self
diagnostic error
Communications Option Card
model code error
Communications Option Card
DPRAM error
7-8
F7 Instruction Manual
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Display
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than
0.5 s.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
-
Check the sequence of the forward and
reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is
unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault
occurs.
Main Circuit Under voltage
The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was
below the Under voltage Detection See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3
Level Setting (L2-05).
faults in the previous table.
• The surge current limiting contactor
opened.
• The control power supply voltage
was below the CUV level.
Main Circuit Over voltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
Decrease the voltage so it's within
the over voltage detection level.
The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
The ambient temperature is too high.
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Yaskawa representative.)
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter overheating alarm signal) was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
-
Motor overheating
E was set for H3-09 and the motor
The motor has overheated.
temperature thermistor input exceeded
the alarm detection level.
F7 Instruction Manual
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminals A1 and A2.
7-9
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
(blinking)
Over torque 1
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
(blinking)
Over torque 2
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
setting in L6-06.
(blinking)
Under torque 1
There has been a current less than the
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
(blinking)
Under torque 2
There has been a current less than the
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
setting in L6-06.
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
setting in F1-09.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the over torque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the over torque.
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the over torque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the over torque.
Overshooting/undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
appropriate.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is disconnected
The Inverter is outputting a frequency, The PG is wired incorrectly.
but PG pulses aren't being input.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and
deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
appropriate.
External error detected for Communications Card other than SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
fault was input from the Option Card.
7-10
-
Remove the cause of the external fault.
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S3)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S4)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S5)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S6)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S7)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Probable causes
An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Corrective Actions
• Reset external fault inputs to the
multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external
fault.
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
-
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
2 s or longer after received control
data.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Option Card Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a
mode where the run command or a
frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Card.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally
received when power was turned ON.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
F7 Instruction Manual
-
7-11
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It won't
be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors.
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Display
7-12
Meaning
Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter
capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Constant setting range
error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Multi-function input
selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H106) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used
together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
• External Base block NO (8) and External Base block NC (9) were selected at the
same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Mode
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• The Multi-function Analog Input Terminal (A2) Function Selection (H3-09) was
set to a value other than 1F and the Terminal 13/14 Switch (1F) was selected, but
the Terminal A1/A2 Switching (H3-13) was set to use the main speed frequency
for A2 (H3-13 = 1).
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
Option Card selection
error
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
Control method selection error
V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
Control Card isn't connected.
Multi-function analog
input selection error
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID function selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2
b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
Constant selection error
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A
function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
PID control selection
error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Incorrect settings
V/f data setting error
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)
Constant setting error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
• C6-01 is 0 and C6-02 is 2 to E.
• C6-01 is 1 and C6-02 is 7 to E.
EEPROM write error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
F7 Instruction Manual
7-13
Errors During Auto tuning
The errors that can occur during auto tuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor will
coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Table 7.4 Errors During Auto tuning
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Motor data error
There is an error in the data input for
auto tuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
motor.
The is an error between the no-load cur• Check the motor rated current and norent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when auto tuning for only lineto-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
Alarm
A minor fault occurred during auto tuning (xxx).
STOP key input
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel
auto tuning.
Line-to-line resistance error
Auto tuning was not completed in the
specified time.
No-load current error
The results of auto tuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant.
Rated slip error
Acceleration error
(detected only for
rotational auto tuning)
Motor speed error
(detected only for
rotational auto tuning)
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than
the Inverter input power supply voltage for Er-08, change the input data.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
The motor did not accelerate in the specTorque Limits) if they are low.
ified time.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
The torque reference was too high
(100%) during acceleration (for open
loop vector control only).
The current flow exceeded the motor
rated current.
Current detection
error
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the
number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).
Check the current detection circuit,
motor wiring, current detector, and
installation methods.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leakage inductance
error
7-14
Auto tuning was not completed in the
specified time.
Check motor wiring.
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 7.4 Errors During Auto tuning (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
The torque reference exceeded 100%
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
during auto tuning.
V/f settings excessive*
Corrective Actions
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.
Auto tuning for the motor core saturation
value could not be completed in the
• Check the input data.
specified time.
• Check motor wiring.
The results of auto tuning has exceeded
• If the motor is connected to the
the setting range for a user constant so a
machine, disconnect it.
temporary setting was made for the
motor core saturation coefficient.
Motor core saturation error (detected
only for rotational
auto tuning)
Rated current setting
alarm*
The rated current is set high.
Check the input data (particularly the
motor output current and motor rated
current).
* Displayed after auto tuning has been completed.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table.
An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is
being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output and alarm output
will not function.
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Display
Meaning
Digital Operator
write-protected
Probable causes
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant
when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
The read data length does not agree.
Read
Illegal read data
Illegal write status
F7 Instruction Manual
The write data is incorrect.
Corrective Actions
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants with the Digital Operator.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
A low Inverter voltage has been
An attempted write of a constant to
detected.
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
7-15
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Display
Meaning
Corrective Actions
ID not matched
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
number is different.
product code and software number.
Inverter capacity
matched
The capacity of the Inverter being
copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity.
Control method
matched
The control method of the Inverter
being copied, and the control method
in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
control method.
Verify error
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Retry the copy.
Digital Operator, and they were different.
Checksum error
The checksum in the Inverter constant
area was compared with the checksum
Retry the copy.
in the Digital Operator constant area,
and they were different.
Copy
7-16
Probable causes
F7 Instruction Manual
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected
when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate
measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Parameter Constants Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if Parameter Constants cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when "constant write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to H105). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the
Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the new password in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the Inverter
may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
F7 Instruction Manual
7-17
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to make
the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator
will light when drive mode is entered.
IMPORTANT
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or
set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter will
not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key make the
DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator will
light when drive mode is entered.
7-18
F7 Instruction Manual
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external
operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2-wire
sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to S7) to
a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter will
not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input,
then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but
the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy. Lengthen the
acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-04 to
0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U), T2(V),
and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor
type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W.
F7 Instruction Manual
7-19
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information is the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This can
cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the
torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to be sure that the
analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be too
long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before outputting
torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Auto tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not be perform if auto tuning has not been performed. Perform auto tuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02)
to V/f control (0 or 1).
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the
set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.
When 1F (frequency reference) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
7-20
F7 Instruction Manual
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been reached.
With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in
constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Openloop Vector Control Mode
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input, then
the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage reference value
exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use a motor with a
low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible.
"Stall prevention during deceleration enabled" is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0 (disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking resistor
does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no over voltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider increasing
the motor capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This can
cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function H3-09 (set value: 10 to 12
or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
F7 Instruction Manual
7-21
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration is
completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and Mw) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0 to 5.0
Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the setting
to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run signal (H201 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated torque,
the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings.
Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if
it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature
is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and the
motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage (i.e.,
1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater
than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special motor for Inverters.
Auto tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if auto tuning has not been performed. Perform auto tuning, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
7-22
F7 Instruction Manual
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
F7 Instruction Manual
7-23
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high
leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s or
more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will
also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants C6-02 to
C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency
of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(torque compensation time constant), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Vector control will not perform if auto tuning has not been performed. Perform auto tuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A1-02)
to V/f control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
7-24
F7 Instruction Manual
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant N1-01) to 0 (disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
F7 Instruction Manual
7-25
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I, and D
constants. (Refer to page 6-89.)
Auto tuning has not been performed with vector control.
Vector control will not perform if auto tuning has not been performed. Perform auto tuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02)
to V/f control.
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the motor
continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it
means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC
injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range.
Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (constant d3-04)
settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-26
F7 Instruction Manual
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection ....................................... 8-2
F7 Instruction Manual
8-1
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months of shipping from the factory or within 12 months of being delivered to the
final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front
cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be
sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Fig 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
Inspection
External terminals,
Are all screws and bolts tight?
mounting bolts, connecAre connectors tight?
tors, etc.
8-2
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
has the total operating time exceeded
Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
F7 Instruction Manual
Fig 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
Inspection
Corrective Procedure
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of
the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions.
In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform period
inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions. The
Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Fig 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Breaker relays
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
5 years
-
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Fuses
10 years
Replace with new part.
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
5 years
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
F7 Instruction Manual
8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 Kw or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
1
Air flow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces
into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the
Inverter.
8-4
F7 Instruction Manual
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the controller.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the back
of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter.
Air flow direction
Controller bracket
Fan cover
Controller
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.4 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
F7 Instruction Manual
8-5
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
card.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is not
necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on the
card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Card
FE NC
Fig 8.5 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
8-6
F7 Instruction Manual
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications ................................. 9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ...... 9-5
F7 Instruction Manual
9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-F7A Control characteristics
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
1.2
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.7
8.8
12
17
22
27
32
44
55
69
82
110
130
160
3.2
4.1
7.0
9.6
15
23
31
45
58
71
85
115 145 180
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
215
283
346
415
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
±5%
Optional
Built in
Not possible
Possible*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The startup torque for a 200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW is 120% (low carrier).
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-2
F7 Instruction Manual
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-F7A Control characteristics
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Output ratings
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
2.8
4.0
5.8
9.5
13
18
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.1
3.7
5.3
7.6
12.5
17
24
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
30
39
Optional
Not possible
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
34
46
57
69
85
110
140
160
200
230
280
390
510
45
60
75
91
112
150
180
216
260
304
370
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
506
675
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
24
31
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Model Number CIMR-F7A Power supply characteristics
40P7
0.4
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Control characteristics
40P4
Built in
Possible*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
F7 Instruction Manual
9-3
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-F7A Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Control characteristics
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Frequency setting resolution
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and
maximum current*2
1:100 (Open loop vector control)
±0.2% (25°C ± 10°C) (Open loop vector control)
5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Open loop vector control)
±5%
0.01 to 150 Hz (CT selected.), 0.01 to 400 Hz (VT selected.)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (10 bit with no sign)
0.001 Hz
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute*1
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute
0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Braking torque
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option, braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.)
Main control functions
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, over torque detection, torque limits, 16-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, auto tuning (rotational or stationary), dwell
functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and function copying.
Motor protection
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous over current protection
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Overload protection
Protective functions
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% /0.5 Hz
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120%/0.5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
Frequency setting signal
Fuse blown protection
Stops for fuse blown.
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute (except for 110 kW Inverters)
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute
Over voltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
Under voltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
ride-thru
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protective structure
Ambient operating temperature
Environment
Specification
Sine wave PWM
Open loop vector control, V/f control, V/f with PG control (switched by constant setting)
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Stops for 15 ms or more.
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits. (Over current level)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (Type 1 (NEMA 1)): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
-10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude
1000 m max.
Vibration
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
Note Rotational auto tuning is required to obtain the specifications labeled as "open loop vector control."
* 1. Not including the 200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW and the 400 V Class Inverters for 220 and 300 kW.
* 2. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
9-4
F7 Instruction Manual
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Name
Model (Code)
Descriptions
Protect Inverter wiring
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter*
NF
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable
for high frequencies.
Prevents burning when
a Braking Resistor is
used.
Magnetic Contactor
HI-J
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out
when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the
coil.
Contains switching
surge
Surge Absorber
DCR2-
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control
relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors
and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates I/O signals
Isolator
DGP
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective
against inductive noise.
Improve the input
power factor of the
Inverter
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
UZDA-
UZBA-
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
These are optional for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Install
DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power
supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Input Noise Filter
(Single phase) LNFB-
(3 phase) LNFDHF
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power
supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter
into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Inverter as possible.
Reduce the affects of
radio and control device
noise
Enable stopping the
machine in a set time
Operates the Inverter
externally
Finemet zerophase reactor to
reduce radio noise
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter
input power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as possible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
MCCB or
ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic
contactor
AC reactor to
improve power
factor
Zero phase
reactor
LF-
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close
to the Inverter as possible.
Braking Resistor
ERF-150WJ
(R00)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Braking Resistor
Unit
LKEB-
(75600-K0)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Braking Unit
CDBR-
(72600-R0)
VS Operator
(small plastic
Operator)
JVOP-95•
(73041-0905X-)
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Frequency
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operaGround
tion control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
VS Operator
(Standard steelplate Operator)
JVOP-96•
(73041-0906X-)
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
1 m cable: (72616W5001)
3 m cable: (72616W5003)
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
JGSM-
A system controller that can be match to the automatic
control system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Provides Inverter
momentary power loss
recovery time
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery
Unit
P000
(73600-P000)
Handles momentary power losses for the control power
supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
2 s).
DCF-6A
Frequency Setter
RV30YN20S (2 kΩ)
Frequency Setter
Knob
CM-3S
Output Voltmeter
SCF-12NH
F7 Instruction Manual
DC
reactor
Inverter
VS Operator
Output-line
noise filter
Motor
VS System Module
Frequency Meter
Braking
resistor
Input-line
noise filter
Output Noise Filter
Controls an Inverter
system
Set/monitor frequencies and voltages externally.
Power supply
Ground
Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for
use with a PWM Inverter.
9-5
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Name
Variable Resistor
Board for FreCorrect frequency refer- quency Reference
ence input, frequency
Frequency Meter
meter, ammeter scales
Scale Correction
Resistor
Model (Code)
Descriptions
2 kΩ (ETX003270)
20 kΩ (ETX003120)
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency reference.
(RH000850)
Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
* Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter must be
suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
9-6
F7 Instruction Manual
The following Option Cards are available
Table 9.5 Option Cards
Type
Code Number
Function
Document
Number
73600D001X
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and
outputs them.
• Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256)
• Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TO-C73630.21
73600D002X
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.).
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
• Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TO-C73630.22
Digital Output Card
DO
08
73600D004X
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters operating status (alarm signals, zero speed detection, etc.)
Output form: Photo coupler output, 6 channels
(48 V, 50 mA max.)
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 VAC: 1 A max., 30VDC: 1 A max.)
TO-C73630.24
2C-Relay
Output Card
DO
02C
73600D007X
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in
addition to those provided by the Inverter.
TO-C73640.8
73600A012X
Used for V/f with PG control. Speed feedback is performed
using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed
fluctuations caused by slipping.
• A-phase pulse (single pulse) input (voltage, complementary, open-collector input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: +12 V, 20 mA
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.1
73600A013X
• Used for V/f control.
• A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.2
73600A014X
• Differential input.
• A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.3
Name
Analog Monitor Card
AO-08
Monitoring
Optional
Cards
Built-in
(connect to
connector)
Analog Monitor Card
AO-12
PG
A2
PG
Speed
Control
Cards
PG
B2
PG
D2
PG-X2
F7 Instruction Manual
73600A015X
•
•
•
•
A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
Input: Conforms to RS-422
Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.4
9-7
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Type
Built-in Com(conmuninected cations
to con- Option
nector) Cards
Name
Code Number
Function
Document
Number
DeviceNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-N
73600C021X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ProfiBus-DP
Communications Interface Card
SI-P
73600C022X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop Inverter
operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
*
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using InterBus-S communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
*
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using CANopen communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ControlNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-U
*
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using ControlNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
CC-Link
Communications Interface Card
SI-C
73600C032X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
InterBus-S
Communications Interface Card
SI-R
CANopen
Communications Interface Card
SI-S
* Under development.
9-8
F7 Instruction Manual
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ............................... 10-2
Motor Application Precautions .................................. 10-5
Wiring Examples ....................................................... 10-8
User Constants........................................................ 10-16
F7 Instruction Manual
10-1
Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power
transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or AC
reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.1
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so that
the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when starting
using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a somewhat
larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa. Never
connect any other devices to these terminals.
10-2
F7 Instruction Manual
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contaminants,
or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that
the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter
on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the carrier
frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits.
(The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or
deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
F7 Instruction Manual
10-3
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W. Check
wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing so
can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more than
one time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
10-4
F7 Instruction Manual
Motor Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for motor application.
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, the
motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa. If 100%
torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special inverter or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must be
considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated
with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to
set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A constant can be set to select low carrier, PWM
modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as
when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed
mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the jump frequency function to
skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
F7 Instruction Manual
10-5
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the motor is
operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a
speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
10-6
F7 Instruction Manual
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the number of
poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the over voltage protective or over current protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select an
Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable
thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the
Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter. Since
the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gear motor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer. In
particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If the
motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned
ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be
affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise
and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.
F7 Instruction Manual
10-7
Wiring Examples
This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main circuits, examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I/O, and other aspects of Inverter wiring.
Using a Braking Resistor Unit
This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-F7A20P4 to -F7A2018 (200 V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
CIMR-F7A40P4 to -F7A4018 (400 V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of
the Braking Resistor Unit.
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
DC Reactor to
improve input
power factor
Braking Resistor Unit *3
(Optional)
Short-circuit bar
MC
3-phase power
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
or 380 to 460 V
50/60 Hz
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Inverter
Motor
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
200 V class Inverters: Ground to
100 ºª max., 400 V class Inverters:
Ground to 10 Ω max.)
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
* 1. A transformer is not required for 200 V class
* 2. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from +1 and +2 when connecting
a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is
Fault contacts
not changed.
Fig 10.2
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
This example shows wiring for a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-F7A2022, -F7A2030 (200 V class Inverters of 22 kW, 30 kW)
10-8
F7 Instruction Manual
DC Reactor to
improve input
A sequence is required to turn
power factor
OFF the power supply for the
(Optional)
thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor
Unit.
Short-circuit bar
Braking Unit
(Optional)
Braking Resistor Unit*2
(Optional)
Level
detector
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
S/L2
T/L3
Motor
Inverter
Ground to 100 ºª max.
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Forward Run/Stop
Fault contacts
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
* 1. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from +1 and +2 when connecting
a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 2. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is
not changed.
Forward run command (forward run when ON)
Reverse run command (reverse run when ON)
External fault
Fig 10.3
F7 Instruction Manual
10-9
Using Braking Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using two Braking Units in parallel.
A sequence is required to turn OFF the
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Thermal
protector
Braking
Resistor Unit
Braking
Resistor Unit
Level
detector
Thermal
protector
Braking Unit 2
Thermal switch
Thermal switch
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
200 to 220 V 50 Hz
200 to 230 V 60 Hz
Inverter
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
Cooling fan
W/T3
Motor
Ground to 100 ºª max.
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
Fault contact output
Forward run command (forward run
when ON)
Reverse run command (reverse run
when ON)
External fault
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop
within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.4
10-10
F7 Instruction Manual
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel.
Thermal
protector
Thermal
protector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Level
detector
A sequence is required to turn OFF the
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Thermal
protector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit
Thermal switch
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
S/L2
Inverter
U/T1
Motor
V/T2
W/T3
T/L3
Cooling fan
Voltage
setting
Ground to 10 ºª max.
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Fault contact output
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
Forward run command (forward run
when ON)
Reverse run command (reverse run
when ON)
External fault
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop
within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.5
F7 Instruction Manual
10-11
Using a VS Operator
This example shows wiring for using a VS Operator. The VS Operator model number is JVOP-95• or JVOP-96
•.
CIMR-F7A27P5 (200 V class Inverters of 7.5 kW)
Short-circuit bar
(Standard)
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
S/L2
Inverter
Motor
V/T2
W/T3
T/L3
•
U/T1
•
JVOP-95 , C-96 VS Operator
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
Ground to 100 ºª max.
Multi-function contact inputs
Sequence common (0 V)
Shield terminal
Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)
Master speed (0 to 10 V, 20 kΩ)
Master speed (4 to 20 mA, 250 Ω)
Multi-function contact
output (Default: Running
signal)
Fault contact output
Open collector 1 (Default:
Zero speed signal)
Frequency meter
Multi-function
analog output
Multi-function
analog output
(Default: Output
frequency)
Open collector 2 (Default:
Speed agreement signal)
Multi-function opencollector output 48 V,
50 mA max.
Multi-function output
common
Fig 10.6
10-12
F7 Instruction Manual
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with
an Internal Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control card to NPN as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN transistor
for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
MCCB
Motor
3-phase power
Inverter
Ground
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
Multi-step
speed setting 1
Multi-step
speed setting 2
Jog frequency
selection
CN5 (NPN setting)
Shield
terminal
Pulse train input
Frequency setting
adjustment
External
frequency
references
Frequency
setter
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz 3 k
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
Frequency setting power
+15 V 20 mA
0 to +10 V
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k )
4 to 20 mA
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 )
0 to 10 V (20 k ) input
Fig 10.7
F7 Instruction Manual
10-13
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with
an External Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control card to EXT as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN transistor
for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an external +24-V power supply.
MCCB
Motor
3-phase power
Inverter
Ground
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
Multi-step
speed setting 1
Multi-step
speed setting 2
Jog frequency
selection
CN5 (EXT setting)
Shield
terminal
Pulse train input
Master speed pulse train
32 kHz 3 k
0
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
Frequency setting
adjustment
External
frequency
references
Frequency
setter
Frequency setting power
+15 V 20 mA
0 to +10 V
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k )
4 to 20 mA
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250
0 to 10 V (20 k ) input
Note:
When using an external +24-V power supply for
a sequence connection for a PNP tansistor
input signal, set the EXT as shown at the right.
External
+24 V
CN5 (EXT setting)
Fig 10.8
10-14
F7 Instruction Manual
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs
This example shows wiring for contact outputs and open collector outputs.
The following example is for the CIMR-F7A27P5 (200 V Class Inverter for 7.5 kW).
MCCB
Motor
3-phase power
Inverter
Ground
Ammeter scale adjustment resistor
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: Ouput current,
0 to +10 V
Frequency meter scale adjustment resistor
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: output frequency,
0 to +10 V
Sequence
Surge
absorber
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.
250 VAC max.
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.
(Default: RUN)
30 VDC max.
Flywheel
diode
48 VDC max.
Flywheel
diode
Open collector 1
(Default: zero speed)
48 VDC max.
Flywheel
diode
Open collector 2
(Default: Freq agree)
Multi-function
open collector output
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Sequence external power
supply
Fig 10.9
F7 Instruction Manual
10-15
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These setting are for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW set to
factory set control method (open loop vector control).
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Factory
Setting
Name
A1-01
A1-02
Language selection for digital
operator display
Constant access level
Control method selection
A1-03
Initialize
0
b5-17
Password
Password setting
0
0
b6-01
b6-02
PID feedback command loss detection time
PID sleep function operation level
PID sleep operation delay time
Acceleration/deceleration time for
PID reference
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell time at start
User setting constants
-
b6-03
Dwell frequency at stop
1
1
0
0
1
b6-04
b8-01
b8-02
b8-03
b8-04
0
b8-05
Dwell time at stop
Energy-saving mode selection
Energy-saving gain
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy-saving coefficient
Power detection filter time constant
0
b8-06
Search operation voltage limiter
0.5
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
b2-02
b2-03
b2-04
b3-01
b3-02
b3-03
b3-05
b4-01
b4-02
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
Prohibition of reverse operation
Read sequence input twice
Operation selection after switching
to remote mode
Run command selection in programming modes
Zero speed level (DC injection
braking starting frequency)
DC injection braking current
DC injection braking time at start
DC injection braking time at stop
Speed search selection
Speed search operating current
Speed search deceleration time
Speed search wait time
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
50
0.00
0.50
2*2 *3
100*2
2.0
0.2
0.0
0.0
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
b5-01
PID control mode selection
0
C1-11
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
1.00
C2-01
b5-03
Integral (I) time
1.0
C2-02
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
100.0
C2-03
b5-05
Derivative (D) time
0.00
C2-04
b5-06
PID limit
100.0
C3-01
b5-07
PID offset adjustment
0.0
C3-02
b5-08
PID primary delay time constant
PID output characteristics selection
0.00
C3-03
0
C3-04
Deceleration time 1
10.0
Acceleration time 2
10.0
Deceleration time 2
10.0
Acceleration time 3
10.0
Deceleration time 3
10.0
Acceleration time 4
10.0
Deceleration time 4
10.0
Emergency stop time
10.0
Accel/decel time setting unit
1
Accel/decel time switching fre0.0
quency
S-curve characteristic time at
0.20
acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at
0.20
acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at
0.20
deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at
0.00
deceleration end
Slip compensation gain
0.0*3
Slip compensation primary delay
2000*2
time
Slip compensation limit
200
Slip compensation selection during
0
regeneration
A1-00
A1-04
A1-05
A2-01 to
A2-32
b1-01
b1-02
b1-03
b1-04
b1-06
b1-07
b1-08
b2-01
b5-09
10-16
1*1
b5-14
2
0*1
b5-15
b5-16
Setting
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.7*4
0.50*5
*6
20
0
10.0
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 10.1 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Output voltage limit operation
selection
Torque compensation gain
Torque compensation time constant
200*2
C5-01
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
0.20
0.200
0.02
E1-03
E1-04
V/f pattern selection
Max. output frequency
0.050
E1-05
Max. voltage
F
60.0
200.0
5.0
1
6*6
15.0*6
15.0*6
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Base frequency
Mid. output frequency
Mid. output frequency voltage
Min. output frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
00
E1-11
Mid. output frequency 2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
E1-12
E1-13
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
Frequency reference 11
0.00
E2-10
D1-12
D1-13
Frequency reference 12
Frequency reference 13
0.00
0.00
E2-11
E3-01
D1-14
Frequency reference 14
0.00
E3-02
D1-15
Frequency reference 15
0.00
E3-03
D1-16
Frequency reference 16
0.00
E3-04
D1-17
Jog frequency reference
6.00
E3-05
D2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
100.0
E3-06
D2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
0.0
E3-07
D2-03
Master speed reference lower limit
0.0
E3-08
D3-01
D3-02
D3-03
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
0.0
0.0
0.0
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
D3-04
Jump frequency width
1.0
E4-04
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Base voltage
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Number of motor poles
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Motor rated output
Motor 2 control method selection
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX)
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
(FA)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency
voltage 1 (VC)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
voltage (VMIN)
Motor 2 rated current
Motor 2 rated slip
Motor 2 no-load current
Motor 2 number of poles (number
of poles)
b5-10
PID output gain
b5-11
C5-02
C5-03
PID reverse output selection
Selection of PID feedback command loss detection
PID feedback command loss detection level
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time 2
C5-05
C6-01
C6-02
C6-03
C6-04
D1-01
D1-02
D1-03
D1-04
D1-05
D1-06
D1-07
D1-08
D1-09
D1-10
ASR limit
CT/VT selection
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
Carrier Frequency Proportional
Gain
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Frequency reference 7
Frequency reference 8
Frequency reference 9
Frequency reference 10
D1-11
b5-12
b5-13
C6-05
F7 Instruction Manual
1.0
C3-05
0
C4-01
0
C4-02
0
Setting
0
1.00
*2 *7
60.0*2
3.0*2
15.0*2 *7
1.5*2
9.0*2 *7
0.0*9
0.0*9
0.0*10
1.90*6
2.90*6
1.20*6
4
9.842*6
18.2*6
0.50
0.75
14*4
0.40*4
0
60.0*2
200.0*2
60.0
3.0 *2
11.0 *7
0.5 *2
2.0 *7
1.90 *6
2.90 *6
1.20 *6
4
10-17
Table 10.1 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
D4-02
D6-01
D6-02
Frequency reference hold function
selection
+ - Speed limits
Field weakening level
Field frequency
E1-01
Input voltage setting
D4-01
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Factory
Setting
Name
9.842*6
0
E4-05
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
10
80
0.0
E4-06
E4-07
F1-01
200*7
F1-02
Motor 2 leak inductance
18.2*6
Motor 2 rated capacity
0.40*6
PG constant
600
Operation selection at PG open cir1
cuit (PGO)
1
H1-04
Terminal S6 function selection
4 (3)*8
F1-04
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
Operation selection at deviation
3
H1-05
6 (4)*8
F1-05
PG rotation
0
H2-01
1
H2-02
0
H2-03
115
1.0
H3-01
H3-02
10
H3-03
0.5
H3-08
0
H3-09
0
2.0
2
1.00
3
0.50
0.0
0.0
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
H3-13
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
Terminal S7 function selection
Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact)
Terminal P1 function selection
(open collector)
Terminal P2 function selection
(open collector)
Gain (terminal A1)
Bias (terminal A1)
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
Gain (terminal A2)
Bias (terminal A2)
Analog input filter time constant
Terminal A1/A2 switching
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Gain (terminal FM)
Bias (terminal FM)
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
0
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
0.50
0
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
0.0
F1-03
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
Integral value during accel/decel
enable/disable
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection delay time
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
F1-12
Number of PG gear teeth 1
F1-13
F1-14
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
Number of PG gear teeth 2
PG open-circuit detection time
Channel 1 monitor selection
Channel 1 gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
Channel 2 gain
Channel 1 output monitor bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
Analog output signal level for
channel 1
Analog output signal level for
channel 2
F4-07
F4-08
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
0
H4-07
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
1
H4-08
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
Channel 3 output selection
Channel 4 output selection
Channel 5 output selection
2
4
6
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
37
H5-04
F5-07
Channel 7 output selection
0F
H5-05
F5-08
F5-09
Channel 8 output selection
DO-08 output mode selection
Operation selection after communications error
Input level of external error from
Communications Option Card
0F
0
H5-06
H5-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection
Analog output 2 signal level selection
Station address
Communication speed selection
Communication parity selection
Stopping method after communication error
Communication error detection
selection
Send wait time
RTS control ON/OFF
1
H6-01
Pulse train input function selection
0
H6-02
Pulse train input scaling
F6-01
F6-02
10-18
Setting
0
1
2
0
100.0
0.0
2
0
100.0
0.0
0.00
0
2
1.00
0.0
3
0
0
1F
3
0
3
1
5
1
0
1440
F7 Instruction Manual
Table 10.1 User Constants (Continued)
No.
F6-03
F6-04
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
L1-01
L1-02
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
L2-01
Name
Stopping method for external error
from Communications Option
1
Card
Trace sampling from Communica0
tions Option Card
Terminal S3 function selection
24
Terminal S4 function selection
14
Terminal S5 function selection
3 (0)*8
Motor protection selection
1
Motor protection time constant
1.0
Alarm operation selection during
3
motor overheating
Motor overheating operation selec1
tion
Motor temperature input filter time
0.20
constant
Momentary power loss detection
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
L2-06
Momentary power loss ride-thru
time
Min. base block time
Voltage recovery time
Under voltage detection level
KEB deceleration time
L2-07
Momentary recovery time
L2-02
L3-02
Frequency reduction gain at KEB
start
Stall prevention selection during
accel
Stall prevention level during accel
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during accel
L2-08
L3-01
L3-04
L3-05
L3-06
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
Factory
Setting
Stall prevention selection during
decel
Stall prevention selection during
running
Stall prevention level during running
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Speed agreement detection level
(+/-)
Speed agreement detection width
(+/-)
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Setting
No.
Factory
Setting
H6-03
Pulse train input gain
100.0
H6-04
Pulse train input bias
0.0
H6-05
H6-06
H6-07
L7-03
L7-04
Pulse train input filter time
Pulse train monitor selection
Pulse train monitor scaling
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type ERF)
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
Overheat pre-alarm level
Operation selection after overheat
pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selection
Output open-phase protection
selection
Ground protection selection
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Ambient temperature
OL2 characteristics selection at
low speeds
0
95
3
L8-05
0.1*6
L8-07
0.1
0.3
190*7
0.0
L8-09
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
0*11
L8-15
100
L8-19
1
N1-01
120
N1-02
50
N2-01
1
N2-02
1
N2-03
120
N3-01
0.0
2.0
N3-02
N3-03
Hunting-prevention function selection
Hunting-prevention gain
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant 2
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
High-slip braking current limit
High-slip braking stop dwell time
0.0
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
40
2.0
o1-01
Monitor selection
6
0
o1-02
Monitor selection after power up
1
Number of auto restart attempts
0
o1-03
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
0
o2-01
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
0
o2-02
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
150
o2-03
Soft CLA selection
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP key during control circuit
terminal operation
User constant initial value
Setting
0.10
2
1440
200
200
0
L5-01
F7 Instruction Manual
Name
0
0
1
0
60
45
1
1
1
1.00
1.00
50
750
5
150
1.0
0
1
1
0
10-19
Table 10.1 User Constants (Continued)
No.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Name
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
L6-04
Torque detection selection 2
L6-05
Factory
Setting
0.1
Setting
No.
o2-04
0
o2-05
Torque detection level 2
150
o2-06
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
0.1
o2-07
L7-01
Forward drive torque limit
200
o2-08
L7-02
o3-01
o3-02
T1-00
T1-01
T1-02
Reverse drive torque limit
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Motor 1/2 selection
Auto tuning mode selection
Motor output power
200
0
0
1
0
0.40
o2-10
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
kVA selection
0*6
Frequency reference setting
0
method selection
Operation selection when digital
0
operator is disconnected
Cumulative operation time setting
0
Cumulative operation time selec0
tion
Fan operation time setting
0
Motor rated voltage
200.0*7
Motor rated current
1.90*6
Motor base frequency
60.00
Number of motor poles
4
Motor base speed
1750
1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
2. The factory setting will change if the control method is changed. The factory settings given above are for V/f without PG control.
3. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
4. For V/f with PG control: 1.0
5. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
6. Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
7. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
8. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
9. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
10.E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after auto tuning.
11.If the set value is 0, acceleration will be to the speeds for the acceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
12.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output. (The value given is for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
10-20
F7 Instruction Manual
F7 Instruction Manual
10-21
10-22
F7 Instruction Manual
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters 2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (847) 887-7000 Fax: (847) 887-7310 Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277 Internet: http://www.motoman.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580 Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795 Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstraβe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, SINGAPORE
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677
YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851
SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878
YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239
Yaskawa Electric America, Inc., March 2001
YEA-TOE-S616-55.1 Printed In U.S.A.
">